JP6520159B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, a lottery is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening, and a symbol indicating the lottery result is dynamically displayed on the display means. In the dynamic display showing the lottery result of 1, by temporarily stopping the symbols and starting the dynamic display again, a gaming machine is proposed to show the player as if the lottery results were displayed dynamically several times. ing.

JP, 2014-39747, A

  However, in such a gaming machine, when it is determined by the player that the temporary stop has occurred, there has been a problem that the enjoyment of the effect is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game.

Gaming machine of the present invention in order to achieve the object, a judging means for performing a determination, and display means identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed, the identification information on the display unit a dynamic display unit capable of dynamic display, and the dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode is by Ri dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit, specific determination result to said display means the identification information to indicate if appears, has a benefits game execution means capable of implementing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, wherein the identification information is a combination of a plurality of identification symbols wherein in I that the combination display mode on and shows the determination result by the determination unit, wherein the dynamic display mode which is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, as a dynamic display of one of the determination result, the identification said a pattern combination After the suspend in the state of being swung by the display mode, which contains quasi-continuous dynamic display mode to dynamically displayed again, the game machine, said combination display mode in the pseudo consecutive dynamic display mode When each of the identification symbols is temporarily stopped, the predetermined static symbol without the identification information is superimposed on the front side of each of the identification symbols temporarily stopped in the combination display mode . the determination der having a stationary symbol display means for displaying in a manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode is executed in a dynamic display of the result is, the stationary pattern is provisionally stopped by said identification Ru der what symbols are hidden on the basis that the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the determination means for performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means Dynamic display means capable of displaying the dynamic display mode, dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display means And a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when is displayed, and the identification information is determined in the combination display mode by the combination of a plurality of identification symbols In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the identification symbol is moved by the combination display mode as the dynamic display of the determination result of 1. The pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display is performed again after the temporary stop in the let-down state is included, and the gaming machine performs the identification of each of the combination display modes in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode. When a symbol is temporarily stopped, a predetermined static symbol that does not have the identification information is superimposed on the front side of each of the identification symbols temporarily stopped in the combination display mode, and the movement result of the determination result of the 1 It has a still symbol display means to display in a mode corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode has been executed within a dynamic display, and the still symbol is a dynamic display of the identification symbol temporarily stopped Are to be hidden based on

It I, there is an effect that can suppress the problem that the interest of the game is reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation | movement unit which looked at the operation | movement unit which decomposed | disassembled the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a rocking movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rocking movement unit. (A) is a front view of a rocking operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of a rocking operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of a rocking operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of a rocking movement unit, (b) is a rear view of the rocking movement unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the rocking movement unit. (A) to (d) is a partial front enlarged view of the rocking operation unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. 26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a reversing operation unit. (A) is a partial side view of a reversal operation unit, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the reversal operation unit in the XXXIb-XXXIb line of Drawing 31 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a view of FIG. 32D is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc), and FIG. 32D is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit along line XXXIId-XXXIId of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflective member and a transmission member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a front view of the drive gear in a 2nd embodiment, a transmission, and a L-shaped lever. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission, and an L-shaped lever. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device of the La-La cross section, (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view, (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of 1st variable winning prize apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 in the first control example and the hit in the ordinary symbol, and (b) is a main control device in the first control example FIG. 6C is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the long press effect lottery table. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 6 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example. It is the model which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the alerting | reporting aspect displayed by 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the long-press effect process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example It is a block diagram showing, and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing an example of a capture effect lottery table. (A) to (b) are an example of a display mode of capture effect displayed on the third symbol display device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flow chart which showed the SW production processing performed by MPU in a display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flow chart which showed the SW production display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control unit in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows time change processing which is performed by MPU in the main control device. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode of temporary stop production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol temporary stop setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in the 5th control example. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of V prize-winning device in the 5th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in a 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the fifth control example FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st random number table in the 5th control example, (b) is the big hit judgment in the 1st random number counter C1 and the 1st special symbol in the 5th control example It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with a value typically, and (c) showed typically the correspondence with the big hit judgment value in the 1st random number counter C1 and the 2nd special symbol in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the random number counter C4 for the 2nd in the 5th example of a control, and the hit in a regular symbol. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a first hit type counter C2 in the fifth control example and the first special symbol (C) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth control example and the jackpot type in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a small hit type counter C5 in the fifth control example and a small in the first special symbol It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with a hit type typically, and (c) is a schematic view showing the correspondence between the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type in the second special symbol. . (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of jackpot in the fifth control example FIG. 18C is a schematic view schematically showing the relationship, and FIG. 18C is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the fifth control example, (D) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example, (b) shows typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example It is a schematic diagram shown. It is the model which showed typically the game flow in the 5th control example. (A) is a time chart showing from winning of the game ball to the second winning opening in the fifth control example to occurrence of a jackpot based on passage of the game ball to the V prize switch, and (b) is the fifth control It is the time chart which showed from the winning of the game ball to the 2nd winning a prize mouth in the example to the occurrence of the jackpot by the special symbol. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic view showing the special figure 2 non-fluctuating state in the special figure 2 gaming state, (b) Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic view showing a special figure 2 fluctuation state among the special figure 2 gaming states. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a small hitting gaming state in the special figure 2 gaming state, and (b) is a fifth A schematic diagram showing a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example and showing a state in which a big hit based on the passage of the game ball to the V prize switch is generated in the special view 2 gaming state It is. (A) is a display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and is a mimetic diagram showing the state at the time of big hit start in the special figure 2 gaming state, (b) Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic view showing that in the special view 2 gaming state, the time saving game is provided after the big hit, ( c) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, showing that the special figure 2 gaming state is transitioned to the special figure 1 gaming state after a big hit FIG. FIG. 125 (a) is a display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125 (b) and is a schematic diagram showing that a big hit D is generated, and FIG. 125 (b) is a timing chart of FIG. It is a display screen displayed, It is the model which showed the state generation which has jackpot C in pending | holding. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time short change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting end processing performed by MPU in the main control in the example of the 5th control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example It is a flowchart which shows round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing jackpot end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example It is a flowchart which shows small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing small hitting end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example V entrance passing command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing 3V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example It is a flow chart which shows 2V production command processing. It is a flow chart which shows V production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the 5th example of control. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the modification in a 5th control example. It is a perspective enlarged view of the detour path member in the 6th control example. It is a rear view of a portion of the first variable winning device in the sixth control example. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the flow-path open apparatus in a 6th control example in perspective. (A)-(c) in the 7th control example are the schematic diagrams shown typically about the execution system of a continuous chance presentation. (A) and (b) in a 7th control example are the schematic diagrams which showed typically an example of the display mode of a continuous chance presentation. (A) and (b) in a 7th control example are the schematic diagrams which showed typically an example of the display mode of a continuous chance presentation. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the seventh control example FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of big hit in the seventh control example, and (b) is the time of deviation in the seventh control example (normal) FIG. 16C is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type in the case of FIG. 7C is a correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (positive change) in the seventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the consecutive opportunity number table at the time of hitting in the seventh control example, and (b) is the content of the consecutive opportunity number table at the time of losing in the seventh control example It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is the model which showed typically the contents of the number-of-latents lottery table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize information processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back precursor setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the eighth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type table in the eighth control example FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control unit in the 8th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the gaming state, the passing state of the gaming ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed It is a timing chart. (A) and (b) are the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is continuously executed It is a timing chart which showed a relation. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 8th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control unit in the 9th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the gaming state, the passing state of the gaming ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th control example.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, showing a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (movable member 310). Rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start The opening (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol The third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 trigger the passage of the ball to display the second symbol as a variable display And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device, each time the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the symbol of "o" and the symbol of "x" as a display symbol (the second symbol (not shown)) The variable display is performed to alternately turn on for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the balls flow down the right side of the game board A part of is made passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol holding lamp It is also lit and displayed on (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) You may. Further, the number of assembled normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembling position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed as a trigger of passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electrically operated symbol The state 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball to the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 during definite variation or time, and the second winning opening 640 Since it is easy to win a prize, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right of the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 (so-called "right-hand"), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second prize port 640 as well as opening the motorized role by passing 67).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close to the front side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the specific winning opening 65a is likely to be won, and the open state and normal closing Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. In addition, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the disposition position is also the lower right side of the first winning a prize opening 64 or the first Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 in a front view, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other devices 228 include drive devices 340, 464 and 560 and drive motors 441, 771, 772, 773 and 774.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 42, the operation unit 200 will be described. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the second slide operation unit 700 mounted on the rear case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, the reverse operation unit 500, the decoration operation unit 600, and the second slide operation unit 700 are accommodated in the inner space of the back case 210, respectively. It is configured as a unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 has an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and contacts the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212. Are disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 7). In the second slide operation unit 700, in the assembled state (see FIG. 5), a rectangular opening is formed at a position coincident with the opening 211a of the back case 210 in a front view.

  With respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, rocking operation unit 300, first slide operation unit 400, reverse operation unit 500 and decoration unit 600 are stacked in a stacked state on the front side of second slide operation unit 700. It is arrange | positioned and accommodated in the back case 210 (refer FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 400) is superimposed on the front side with respect to a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 700). Being arranged, in front view, a given operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light transmitting material, and the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13 can be viewed by the player, the predetermined operation unit It is possible to make the player visually recognize only the necessary part of and to shield other parts from the player by other operation units. As a result, it is not necessary to design a predetermined effect member shielded by another operation unit on the premise that the whole is viewed by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, outlines of operation modes of the rocking operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400 and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. It should be noted that, in FIG. 8, the rising member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swinging operation unit 300 are disposed at the extended position, while the tilting member 460 and the hanging member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 (FIG. The state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are arranged in the overhanging position is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swinging operation unit 300 swings to the swinging end side opposite to the base end side of the arm member 320 whose base end side is pivotably supported. The arm member 320 and the rising member 330 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the rising member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the back case 210 and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted, and the rising member 330 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 swings to the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 22) which is slid downward and to the bending arm 433 (see FIG. 22) of the suspension member 430. A movably supported tilting member 460 is provided, and the suspending member 430 and the tilting member 460 are operated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the back case 210, and can not be seen by the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the extended position shown in FIG. 9, the hanging member 430 is disposed at the end in the sliding direction (left), and the tilting member 460 is at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display 81). , See FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 is provided with a pair of slide members 720 and 740 which are slidably formed, and the respective slide members 720 and 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It operates between the position and the overhanging position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 is retracted to the left and right outside of the opening 211 a of the back case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are above and below the opening 211 a of the back case 210. It is evacuated outward and invisible from the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the slide members 720 and 740 are disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display 81, see FIG.

  The second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 project.

  As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 is provided with a rectangular plate-like reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 28), and the reflecting member 520 is formed so as to be capable of reversing (turning over) the face on which the player can see. Ru. The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member projecting at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 300, 400, 700. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated to the left (see FIG. 5) of the opening 211 a of the back case 210.

  Each of the operation units 300 to 700 is formed to be independently operable and, as described above, disposed in a stacked (stacked) state, and therefore, among the operation units 300 to 700, With regard to those disposed in different layers, even if the operation member is a mode in which the operation member projects inward of the opening 211a of the back case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, not only the respective operation units 300 to 700 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced. The respective operation units 300 to 600 are arranged in the same layer, and the respective operation units 300 to 600 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7).

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are disposed at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display are provided. A gap for the second slide operation unit 700 is created between the device 81 and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position, shielding is performed so that a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can not be viewed in front view Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from looking at the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 through a gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view in the left and right direction).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the overhanging position, so that the player can Can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740 in a diagonal direction. As a result, it is possible to reliably shield part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 so as not to be visible, and the rendering effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the rising member 330 of the swinging operation unit 300 is disposed at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second sliding operation unit 700 are disposed at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the swing operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the swing operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 There is a gap for the second slide operation unit 700 between them. Therefore, when only the rising member 330 of the swinging operation unit 300 is disposed at the extended position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible in front view Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 through a gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left and right).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the standing member 330 of the swinging operation unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both disposed at the extended position, so that the player can A gap that is viewed from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. As a result, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so as not to be visible, and the rendering effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  The rocking operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are front perspective views of the rocking operation unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the rising member 330 are disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the rising member 330 are disposed at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the rocking operation unit 300 is rocked about the rocking shaft 312, and the posture of the rising member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is changed before and after the rocking (tension Stand up toward the exit position). Next, the overall configuration of the rocking operation unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded back perspective view of the rocking operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the rocking operation unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 pivotally supported on the base end side by the base member 310, and an arm member 320 thereof. The rising member 330 is supported on the swinging end, which is the end opposite to the base end of the base member, and a drive device disposed on the back of the lower right portion of the base member 310 in a front view (see FIG. 14) 340, a transmission device 350 engaged with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and connected to the arm member 320, a torsion spring 360 for applying an urging force to the arm member 320, and a lower right portion of the base member 310 in a front view And a cover member 370 attached to the front of the main body.

  The base member 310 is a member which makes the thickness direction coincide with the front-rear direction and becomes a skeleton of the swing operation unit 300, and is fixed to the fitting hole 311 drilled in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311 A cylindrical swing shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 projecting in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311, a drive gear insertion hole 314 drilled adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole A guide hole 315, which is a pair of elongated holes concentrically extended with 311, is formed on the left side of the guide hole 315 in a front view (see FIG. 14), and is bent to the opposite side to the guide hole 315 It has an upright hole 316 which is an elongated hole extended, and a hook portion 317 projected like a hook on the front side in the right side view of the fitting hole 311 in a front view.

  The arm member 320 is a member for causing the swinging operation unit 330 to project inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the back case 210, and the main body portion 321 formed in a long plate shape, A penetrating cylindrical tubular portion 322 disposed on the base end side of the main body portion 321, and a sliding ring portion 323 opened in the same direction as the tubular portion 322 at the swing end of the main body portion 321; A plate-like front abutment portion 324 bulked up and disposed on the front side of the main body portion 321, a long hole-like release hole 325 extending along a straight line drawn radially from the cylindrical portion 322, and the main body A pair of sliding parts 326 formed on the back side of the part 321 and protruding toward the base member 310, and protruding toward the front in the left side of the cylindrical part 322 in a front view (see FIG. 14) And a projecting portion 327.

  The cylindrical portion 322 is a portion that is supported by the pivot shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung with the cylindrical portion 322 axially supported by the swing shaft 312 as a fulcrum.

  The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion for supporting the rising member 330 in the inner shaft. It is formed to have a large diameter, and suppresses the wobble of the rising member 330.

  The front abutment portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 in the vicinity of the proximal end side, and is not fastened in the vicinity of the swinging end side. Therefore, a gap is formed between the front abutment portion 324 and the main body portion 321, and in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the projecting end side portion of the rising member 330 is the front abutment portion 324 and the main body portion It is accommodated in the gap between it and 321 (see FIG. 16).

  The release hole 325 is a long hole connected to the restricting sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and functions to restrict the swing of the arm member 320 in the positional relationship between the transmission device 350, the cylindrical portion 322 and the release hole 325. These holes will be described later in detail.

  Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are respectively inserted into the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 is slid into the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 is swinging. While suppressing the rattling of the arm member 320 and stabilizing the swing of the arm member 320. In addition, since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip end of the sliding portion 326, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from coming off from the guide hole 315 and the rocking operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. It can be done.

  The projecting portion 327 is a portion to which the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and a portion to which the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

  The rising member 330 is a member disposed on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the upward direction, and includes a plate-like main portion 331 and its main portion A larger diameter than the outer diameter of the overhang ring portion 332 which is projected like a large diameter ring from the back side of the 331, the change sliding portion 333 which is provided on the back side at the base end side, and the overhang ring portion 332 And a securing portion 334 formed in the shape of a disc and fastened and fixed to the change sliding portion 333.

  The main body portion 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape including the major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and the minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

  The overhang ring portion 332 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Therefore, the rising member 330 is pivotally supported so that the outer side surface of the overhanging ring portion 332 is in contact with the inner side surface of the sliding ring portion 323 in a wide range (large area). Therefore, even when the large-sized upright member 330 is pivotally supported at one location, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the upright member 330 due to the swing of the arm member 320.

  The change sliding portion 333 is inserted into the upstanding hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the upstanding member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung, which will be described in detail later. In addition, since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip end of the change slide portion 333, the change slide portion 333 is prevented from falling off the standing hole 316 and the swinging operation of the arm member 320 is performed. Can be stabilized.

  The retaining portion 334 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, and is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the rising member 330 and the back surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Abuts on the side. Therefore, the rising member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out of the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

  The driving device 340 is a motor disposed on the back side of the base member 310 and driving the arm member 320. The driving device 340 includes a driving gear 341 that is rotationally driven. The driving gear 341 is inserted into the driving gear of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission device 350 is a member to which the drive force of the drive device 340 is first transmitted, and is supported by the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 at the proximal end side and meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340. Ru. Further, the swinging end, which is the end opposite to the base end side, is provided with a restricting sliding portion 351 protruding toward the front side.

  The restricting sliding portion 351 is inserted into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the restricting sliding portion 351 is slid to the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 while the arm member 320 is swinging. Further, particularly when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position toward the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the drive device 340 transmitted through the transmission device 350.

  The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring serving as a power source when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position in the swinging movement of the arm member 320, and A proximal end arm 361 supported (held downward) and a movable end arm 362 supported (held downward) supported by the projection 327 of the arm member 320 are provided.

  Next, the rocking operation of the rocking operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the swing operation unit 300 illustrating the swing operation of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the rising member 330 in time series, 16 (b), 17 (b) and 18 (b) are rear views of the swing operation unit 300, showing the swing operation of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the rising member 330 in time series. In FIG. 16, the state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position is the state in which the change sliding portion 333 of the rising member 330 is disposed at the point where the curvature of the rising hole 316 changes in FIG. 17. At 18, the state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the rising member 330 takes a posture in which the major axis direction D1 (left and right direction in FIG. 16) is turned horizontally. At this time, the projecting end side portion of the rising member 330 is accommodated between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front abutment portion 324.

  That is, in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player by using a space necessary to shield the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, a limited space can be effectively used outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and the change sliding portion 333 of the rising member 330 is disposed at the lower end of the rising hole 316. Thus, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as a stopper when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the extended position, the rising member 330 changes its posture so that the major axis direction D1 is in the vertical direction (upright posture).

  The dimension (plate thickness) along the thickness direction of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 (the wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) is larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 in the vicinity of the upper end Ru. Then, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. In addition, in this embodiment, it forms in the aspect which the clearance gap formed changes gradually.

  The clearance formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Therefore, resistance which arm member 320 receives from guide hole 315 at the time of starting from a retreat position can be controlled, and high speed at the time of starting of arm member 320 can be secured.

  Further, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is greater than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with a somewhat short dimension (the length of the sliding portion 326 and the thickness of the base member 310 are substantially equal). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 disposed near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from being shaken in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

  In the present embodiment, the rising member 330 is disposed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the projecting position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 falls forward due to the weight of the rising member 330 (falls to the front side of the drawing of FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a supporting point of the forward fall. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Thus, the arm member 320 can be supported in a face-to-face contact with the base member 310, and the resistance to forward tilting of the arm member 320 can be improved.

  Here, the standing hole 316 includes an attitude changing portion 316a formed near the lower end, and a concentric circle portion 316b formed near the upper end.

  The posture changing portion 316 a is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) which is the swing shaft of the arm member 320. When the change sliding part 333 of the raising member 330 slides on the posture changing part 316a, the degree of change in the posture of the raising member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized. This is because the posture changing portion 316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the sliding ring portion 323.

  Thereby, the posture change of the rising member 330 can be completed in a short period of time from the start, and the posture change between the rising member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the player recognizes the rising member 330. Therefore, in the retracted position, the shielding space in the vertical direction of the rising member 330 can be suppressed, and at the overhanging position, the effect of integrally visualizing the rising member 330 and the arm member 320 can be improved.

  Further, at the time of starting from the retracted position of the arm member 320, the resistance associated with the rising member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the rising member 330 is disposed at the retracted position, the direction in which the change sliding portion 333 is rotated about the cylindrical portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture change portion 316a. Therefore, at the time of starting of the arm member 320 from the retracted position, work performed by the rotational force around the cylindrical portion 322 in the change sliding portion 333 is zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, the resistance given to the arm member 320 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the high speed at the time of starting of the arm member 320 can be ensured.

  The concentric circle portion 316 b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in a direction along a circle centered on the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the change sliding part 333 of the rising member 330 slides on the concentric part 316 b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring part 323 of the arm member 320 and the change sliding part 333 of the rising member 330 does not change. The posture of the rising member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. Thereby, the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one, and the effect which performs integrally the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be implement | achieved easily.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 is disposed at the upper end of the guide hole 315, and the changing sliding portion of the rising member 330. 333 are disposed at the upper end of the upstanding holes 316. Thus, when the arm member 320 is swung upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as a stopper. In particular, as described later, since the arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 360, the need for a stopper at the end is greater than when driven by a motor or the like. In addition, since the sliding portion 326 is formed in a pair, the force generated when the sliding portion 326 functions as a stopper can be dispersed. Thereby, the durability of the sliding portion 326 can be improved.

  Although the change sliding portion 333 of the rising member 330 can also function as a stopper, since the rising member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, a strength problem occurs. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are integrally formed on the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. It is more suitable to use as a stopper.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the overhanging position, the overhanging end side (upper side in FIG. 18) of the rising member 330 overhangs above the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. It is formed. Therefore, even if the swing angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, the action of causing the rising member 330 to project to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be secured. The design freedom of the movement angle can be improved.

  In addition, since the movement distance on the overhanging end side of the rising member 330 can be kept large while the swing angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, the effect of increasing the moving speed of the rising member 330 can be improved. it can. This effect is remarkable in the vicinity of the retracted position (see FIG. 16) where the degree of posture change of the rising member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is remarkable (see FIG. 16). It can be done.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19, a state immediately before the rising member 330 is stored between the arm member 320 and the front abutment portion 324 will be described. 19 (a) is a front view of the rocking operation unit 300, FIG. 19 (b) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit 300, and FIG. 19 (c) is a bottom view of the rocking operation unit 300. FIG. 19 (a) to 19 (c) illustrate a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at an intermediate position between the extended position and the retracted position, and in detail, the extended position of the arm member A state is shown in which the overhanging end side of the rising member 330 starts to be stored between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front abutment portion 324 when it is swung from the rear to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, the front abutting portion 324 is disposed on the front side (upper side of FIG. 19C) of the rising member 330. Thus, the rising member 330 is abutted against the front abutment portion 324 even when the rising member 330 shakes around the sliding ring portion 323 as a fulcrum when the arm member 320 swings (swing in the vertical direction in FIG. 19C). The wobble of the rising member 330 can be suppressed.

  Here, the position A at which the rising member 330 and the front abutment portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in a front view is higher than the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Is formed. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the front stage where the wobble of the rising member 330 becomes large (the stage positioned inside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81) Therefore, it is possible to overlap the movement trajectories of the rising member 330 and the front abutment portion 324 in the front-rear direction, and suppress the wobble of the rising member 330 by bringing the rising member 330 into contact with the front abutment portion 324 of the arm member 320. it can.

  FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d) are diagrams for explaining in time series the process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swinging operation unit 300 from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a partial front enlarged view of rocking movement unit 300 in the end side. 20 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 20 (c) shows the state from FIG. 20 (b). A state in which the arm member 320 is swung toward the extended position by a predetermined amount is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 370 is omitted in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d).

  First, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position (change in posture from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. By rotating the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14) from the extended position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. 20D, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is rotated and transmitted. When the restricting sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, the arm member 320 is moved via the states of FIG. 20C and FIG. 20 (a))). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the drive device 340.

  In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the drive device 340 can be suppressed. For example, in the case of an electric motor, the motor capacity can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 are extended vertically downward (see FIG. 18B). Thereby, the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the raising member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the raising hole 316 can be suppressed at the start of the swing from the extended position.

  Next, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position (a change in posture from FIG. 20A to FIG. 20D) will be described. The biasing force of the torsion spring 360 is exerted on the arm member 320. In a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the proximal end arm 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed from the upper side by the collar 317 of the base member 310 and the moving end side end Reference numeral 362 is pressed by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320 in the lower right direction.

  Thereby, the distance between the proximal end arm 361 and the moving end side arm 362 is reduced with the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the torsion spring 360 is elastic in the direction of lifting the arm member 320 (upper left direction) The force is in the most accumulated state. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is restricted by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the cylindrical portion 322 as the rotation shaft of the arm member 320 and the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is The direction Y is perpendicular to the direction Y connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 pivotally supporting the transmission device 350 so as to pivot and the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

  In this case, the restricting sliding portion 351 can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. As a result, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the retracted position even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is not required, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, even in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the overhanging position, the restricting sliding portion 351 is positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Thereby, even if the driving force from the drive device 340 is not required, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the extended position, so that energy consumption of the drive device 340 can be suppressed.

  The operation mode of the drive device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the drive device 340 is used to release the restricting sliding portion 351 from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. The drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount (on state) clockwise in a front view. Then, the transmission device 350 engaged with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the restricting sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relation between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20B).

  Here, in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the distance between the proximal end arm 361 and the movable end arm 362 is reduced with the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the torsion spring 360 is an arm The elastic force directed in the lifting direction (upper left direction) of the member 320 is in the most accumulated state.

  From this state, when the restricting sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350, the arm member 320 is swung by the elastic force of the torsion spring 360. Thereby, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

  For example, in a mode of gradually increasing the driving force such as a driving motor, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the speed at the start of the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the start, the acceleration at the start of the arm member 320 can be secured large. Thus, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

  When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (turned off), and the drive gear 341 is allowed to idle. The arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20C).

  When the arm member 320 reaches near the extended position (see FIG. 20C), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is again rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount (ON state) in the front view, and the restricting sliding portion 351 is the arm It is located at the dead point in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission 350

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position, the driving force of the driving device 340 is not always generated in the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 is near the retracted position and the extended position. The drive device 340 is driven (ON state) only when it is disposed at the position of (4), and the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the extended position. Thereby, as compared with the case where the driving force of the drive device 340 is always applied to the arm member 320, the period for driving the drive device 340 can be reduced, and the life of the drive device 340 can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d), when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position, the transmission shaft 313 for pivotally supporting the regulation sliding portion 351 and the transmission device 350 is connected. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are arranged to coincide with each other.

  As a result, the rotation direction of the restricting sliding portion 351 coincides with the extending direction of the release hole 325 at the start of rotation when the arm member 320 is rotated from the state of being disposed at the retracted position or the extended position. At this time, the resistance that the restricting sliding portion 351 receives from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required at the start of operation requiring the largest force can be reduced.

  Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIGS. 21A and 21B are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG. In FIG. 21 (a), a state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and in FIG. 21 (b), the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are disposed at the projecting position. The illustrated state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slidingly moved obliquely downward from the retracted position (upper right to lower left in front view), and the posture of the tilting member 460 is in the process of the slide movement. Change (the more you move to the overhang position, the more you tilt). Next, the entire configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded back perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L shape in a front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and a cover member thereof. A suspension member 430 having a substantially T-shape in a front view and being slid between the base member 410 and a front side of the base member 410, and a drive for sliding the suspension member 430. A driving device 440 for generating a force, an elongated plate-like auxiliary member 450 having one end pivotally supported on the proximal end side of the suspension member 430 and the other end connected to the base member 410; A tilting member 460 supported on the overhanging end side, which is an end opposite to the base end side of the hanging member 430, and a connecting member 470 for connecting the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 are mainly provided. Composed of Te.

  The base member 410 is a member which is formed in a plate shape of L shape in front view and forms a framework of the first slide operation unit 400, and near the right end portion of the plate-like main body lateral long part 411 and the main body lateral long part 411 And a guide rib portion which is provided on the front side of the main body horizontal portion 411 so as to be slightly inclined with respect to the left and right direction and which is projected in a linear rib shape. 413, an insertion hole 414 which is drilled substantially at the center of the horizontally long main body and into which the drive shaft of the drive device 441 is inserted, and a lower side portion of the vertically long main body 412 It mainly includes a guide hole 415 formed in an elongated hole shape and a pair of rotation shafts 416 on which various gears of the drive device 440 are supported.

  The main body horizontally long portion 411 includes an outer frame 411 a protruding in a wall shape toward the front side at the upper side and the left and right edges. The outer frame 411a is a portion to which the cover member 420 abuts on the front side, and is slightly longer than the length of the slide main body 431 of the suspension member 430 in the thickness direction (vertical direction of the slide plane of the suspension member 430). It is formed long.

  The slide plane of the suspension member 430 means a plane parallel to the front of the base member 410.

  The guide hole 415 is extended from the lower right to the upper left of the base member 410.

  The cover member 420 is a member attached from the front side of the base member 410 and forming a gap between the cover member 420 and the base member 410. It mainly includes a portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along a direction in which the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 is extended.

  Since the main body portion 421 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410, the hanging member 430 moves in the front-rear direction even when the hanging member 430 slides. Regardless of this, the contact area of the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420 can be equally secured.

  The suspension member 430 is a member which is disposed in the gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is slid along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, and has a rack gear on its upper side. A horizontally long plate-like slide main body 431 to be engraved, a concave groove 432 concaved in a groove shape on the back side of the slide main body 431 and abutted against the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, a slide The plate-like bending arm 433 which is suspended from the substantially central portion of the main body 431 and bent toward the overhanging position in the middle, and the slide body 431 in the portion where the bending arm 433 of the slide body 431 starts to hang. Mainly includes a swinging shaft 434 protruding from the front to the front side, and a cylindrical suspension cylinder 435 extending toward the front side at the tip (projecting end) of the bending arm 433

  The slide main body 431 is formed slightly thinner than the gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the hanging member 430 can slide between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (the fastening direction of the cover member 420 to the base member 410).

  The recessed groove 432 is a recessed groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413, and the suspending member 430 slides obliquely downward by the recessed groove 432 sliding on the guide rib portion 413. Be moved.

  The bending arm portion 433 is extended along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 in the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed in the extended position, and the base member 410 in the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed in the retracted position. The thickened portion 433a formed to have an increased thickness on the front side is provided in a portion formed below the main body laterally elongated portion 411. The bending arm portion 433 on the slide main body 431 side of the thick portion 433a is thinner than the slide main portion 431 and the thick portion 433a. Thus, deformation in the thickness direction of the bending arm 433 is locally generated at the bending arm 433 on the slide main body 431 side of the thick portion 433a. Further, the thickness direction of the bending arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction (slide direction) in which the rack gear is provided.

  The swinging shaft 434 is a shaft which penetrates the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and protrudes to the front side of the cover member 420, and is inserted into the swinging hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

  The hanging cylinder 435 is extended beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. Thereby, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 21A and FIG. 25A), the auxiliary member 450 can be stored between the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460. Become.

  The driving device 440 is a device in which each member is formed so as to sandwich the base member 410 from the front and back, and generates a driving force necessary for the movement of the suspension member 430. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft to be penetrated, a drive gear 442 axially supported on the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and disposed in front of the base member 410, and meshed with the drive gear 442 It mainly includes a pair of transmission gears 443 pivotally supported by a pair of rotation shafts 416, respectively.

  One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is meshed with a rack gear engraved on the upper side surface of the slide main body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 engaged with the transmission gear 443 is slid.

  The auxiliary member 450 is a member disposed on the front side of the cover member 420. One end of the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430, and the other end slides into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A body portion 451 which is connected in an elongated plate shape, which can be connected, a swing hole 452 which is drilled at one end, and a slide shaft 453 which protrudes in the rear direction at the other end; A hanging shaft 454 protruding from the middle position of the main body 451 in the back direction is mainly provided.

  The auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 so that the auxiliary member 450 can not move in the thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 25). Is formed. In addition, the auxiliary member 450 is formed to be closer (swayed) to the tip of the thickened portion 433 a of the bending arm portion 433 as the hanging member 430 slides to the retracted position. Thereby, even if the suspension member 430 shakes in the thickness direction, the suspension member 430 can abut the auxiliary member 450, thereby suppressing the wobble of the suspension member 430.

  The swing hole 452 is externally supported by the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430. Thereby, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be swingable about the swing shaft 434. That is, as the hanging member 430 slides, the auxiliary member 450 is swung (tilted) about the swing shaft 434.

  The slide shaft 453 is slidably coupled to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. As a result, the other end of the auxiliary member 450 (the end on the lower right side in front view) is slid along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. When the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is disposed at the upper end (upper left end) of the guide hole 415, and the suspension member 430 is retracted (see FIG. 25). The slide shaft 453 is disposed at the lower end (right lower end) of the guide hole 415 when the slide shaft 453 is disposed.

  The tilting member 460 is a member pivotally supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430 and having an independent drive source (drive device 464), and is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and has a long plate shape. And a first cover member 462 fastened to the lower portion of the base member 461 from the front side and forming a gap between the base member 461 and the first cover member 462 and the base member A transmission device 463 disposed in a gap formed between it and 461, a drive device 464 for generating a driving force to be transmitted to the transmission device 463, and the transmission device 463 are connected and the base member 461 is elongated. A movable base member 465 slidably formed in a direction, and a second cover disposed on the front side of the movable base member 465 and fastened and fixed to the movable base member 465 And wood 466, a mainly includes.

  The base member 461 is a member formed in a long plate shape, and is provided with a hanging shaft 461a which is provided in a cylindrical shape on the back side and is supported by the hanging cylinder 435 of the hanging member 430 by inset fitting. , A connecting shaft 461b juxtaposed with the hanging shaft 461a, a box-shaped storage portion 461c adjacent to the connecting shaft 461b and having an opening directed to the back side, and a front surface above the storing portion 461c A pair of rotary shafts 461d protruding on the side and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e juxtaposed along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461 are mainly provided.

  The housing portion 461 c forms a space for housing the drive device 464, and a hole for penetrating the drive shaft 464 a of the drive device 464 is formed at the bottom.

  The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a pivotally supported by a drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b meshed with the drive gear 463a and pivotally supported by a pair of rotation shafts 461d, and the pair of transmission gears Among the 463 b, the crank pin 463 c is mainly provided so as to protrude at a position eccentric to the transmission gear 463 b provided on the moving base member 465 side.

  The crank pin 463c is rotated around the rotation shaft 461d as the drive gear 463a is rotated and the transmission gear 463b is rotated.

  The moving base member 465 is a member formed in a long plate shape, and a posture maintaining pin 465a having a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) protruding from the back side and being inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e. And a long slide hole 465b extending and drilled in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and a pair of bulky upper portions 465c projecting on the front side.

  The slide hole 465b is connected to the crankpin 463c of the transmission gear 463b, so as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crankpin 463c is changed, the movable base member 465 follows the extension direction of the slide hole 461e. It slides.

  The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a fastened and fixed to the pair of bulk upper portions 465c. Therefore, in a state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the movable base member 465, as the movable base member 465 is slidingly moved, the second cover member 466 is also slidingly moved.

  The connecting member 470 is a member that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material, and is drilled at the upper end and pivotable about the hanging shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450. A hanging hole 471 supported, and a cylindrical portion 472 formed in a cylindrical shape at the lower end and rotatably supported on the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 460 so as to be pivotable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. A state in which the first cover member 466 slides obliquely upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  As the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is driven by the drive device 464 (see FIG. 23), the second cover member 466 slides and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in a front view (see FIG. 24) Can produce effects that change.

  Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430, vibration and wobble are easily generated when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. In the present embodiment, since there are a plurality of configurations that suppress the vibration wobble, this will be described below.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state in which the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 21A) will be described in detail. FIG. 25A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the upper end position (retracted position) of the movement path in which the suspension member slides is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially shown. It is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 supported by the suspending member 430 are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) moved to the right outside of the display area P.

  At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is stored at the front side of the hanging member 430 and the rear side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are stacked and arranged in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 25A), the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction It can be arranged compactly in comparison with the total area of the individual members in. Therefore, the space of the right outside of display field P of the 3rd symbol display 81 (refer to Drawing 2) can be controlled, and display field P can be secured large.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is accommodated between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and the base on the back surface on the overhanging end side (tip end side) A main body longitudinal portion 412 of the member 410 is disposed. Thereby, wobble in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the retracted position can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by a swing shaft 434 formed in the vicinity where the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is suspended, and the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bending arm 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases the bending arm 433 as the suspension member 430 slides from the retracted position to the extended position. It forms in the aspect which approaches the tip of thick part 433a (is rock | fluctuated).

  Therefore, the protrusion (protrusion length from the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bending arm portion 433 is larger when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retraction position than when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhang position. Is shortened. As a result, even when the suspending member 430 is shaken by driving the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the suspending member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the suspending member 430 is formed short. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wobble in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the retracted position (wobble of the tip of the bending arm 433).

  Here, the slide movement of the suspension member 430 will be described. The hanging member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 with the recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back side, and is therefore slid along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 is extended in a straight line toward the diagonally lower direction (from the upper right in FIG. 25 (a) to the lower left in FIG. 25 (a)).

  The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is caused by the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position, the drive gear 442 is driven by the drive motor 441 from the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise in a front view, the rotation of the pair of transmission gears 443 is rotated, and the rack gear engaged with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (the left side of FIG. 25A) is moved. A hanging member 430 provided with the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the extended position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state in which the hanging member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. 26 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 26 (a) and 26 (b), a state in which the hanging member 430 is disposed at the lower end position (projecting position) of the movement path along which the sliding movement is performed is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partial. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the lower end (the lower end in FIG. 26 (a)) of the slide main body 431 in the moving direction is the outer frame of the base member 410 in the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. It abuts on 411a. Further, as described above, since the suspension member 430 moves downward toward the overhanging position, the position of the suspension member 430 is set even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is released. The overhang position can be reliably maintained.

  For example, when the direction of sliding movement of the hanging member 430 is horizontal, gravity is not applied to the direction of sliding movement even if the hanging member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position, so the hanging member 430 is overhanged. It is necessary to add another force to maintain the position.

  On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the force of gravity acts in the direction of slide movement. Lower member 430 can be maintained in the extended position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive device 440 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the suspension member 430 is disposed in the extended position, the suspension member 430 retracts in the portion where the bending arm 433 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. It becomes smaller compared with the case where it is arranged at the position (see FIG. 25 (b)). Therefore, it is difficult to suppress the wobbling of the bending arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 by the base member 410 and the cover member 420.

  On the other hand, the base side of the bending arm portion 433 is extended in the extending direction (the lower left direction in FIG. 26B) of the auxiliary member 450 in the state where the suspending member 430 is disposed at the extended position. Thereby, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the overlapping area of the auxiliary member 450 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 and the bending arm portion 433 is formed wide.

  The auxiliary member 450 is formed apart from the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 only by the thickness of the cover member 420 as described above, and the bending arm portion 433 shakes in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 It is formed to be able to abut. Since the thin portion (the portion closer to the slide main portion 431 than the thick portion 433 a) of the bending arm 433 is formed to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420 in the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhang position. The wobble of the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 due to the drive of the tilting member 460 can be easily generated in the thickness direction (the wobble in the thickness direction is dominant). Thereby, the wobble of the suspension member 430 in the sliding direction can be suppressed.

  Further, a thin portion (a portion closer to the slide main portion 431 than the thick portion 433a) of the bending arm portion 433 is a short direction (slide (slide) of the slide main portion 431 which is slid between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Are formed adjacent to each other in the direction perpendicular to the direction). Thereby, the wobbling caused by driving the tilting member 460 can be absorbed by the bending of the bending arm 433 and the sliding main body 431 can be prevented from being shaken in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 26). it can. Thus, the slide main body portion 431 can be suppressed from being pressed against the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and abrasion of the slide main body portion 431 in the thickness direction can be suppressed.

  For example, it is conceivable that an arm having a thickness equal to that of the slide body 431 is extended in the lateral direction of the slide body 431, and the tip of the arm is formed thin. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs bending, the end of the arm having the same thickness as that of the slide body 431 shakes, whereby the wobble of the arm is transmitted to the slide body 431. As a result, the slide main body 431 may be shaken.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thickness is made thin from the root of the bending arm 433 extended from the slide main body 431, the wobble generated at the tip of the bending arm 433 is used for bending the thin portion. The effect of preventing the part 431 from shaking can be made remarkable.

  FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 26 (a). As shown in FIG. 27, since the bending arm 433 is provided with a thickened portion 433a which is thickened toward the auxiliary member 450, when the bending arm 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430, the bending thereof is wobbled. The bending arm portion 433 can be easily brought into contact with the auxiliary member 450 from when the amplitude of the force is small.

  Referring back to FIG. The auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, so that movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 plays a role as a stopper for preventing the bending arm 433 of the suspension member 430 from moving to the front side. Thereby, when the suspension member 430 is arrange | positioned in the overhanging position, the wobble in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 in can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is closer than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is placed slightly above. Here, when the tilting member 460 does not change its posture with respect to the hanging member 430 (when it is fixed), the hanging member 430 is slid downward as it goes to the overhanging position. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the inclining member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the inclining member 460 of the present embodiment in the state where the inclining member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the suspending member 430 is arranged at the retracted position In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be disposed at a position offset upward by a distance L1 corresponding to the lowering inclination.

  Therefore, an extra right space of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) may be required, or it may be a factor to reduce the design freedom of the size of the tilting member 460.

  However, in the present embodiment, the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed such that the hanging member 430 is lifted by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450 as the hanging member 430 moves toward the extended position, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is suspended. It is lifted relative to the member 430. Thereby, the lower end position of the tilting member 460 in the case where the suspension member 430 is disposed in the retracted position (see FIG. 25A) and the case in which the suspension member 430 is disposed in the extended position (FIG. And the lower end position of the inclining member 460 at approximately the same height (vertical direction in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26).

  Therefore, when the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, there is no need to arrange the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 for the downward inclination, and the right of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 The outer space can be used effectively and the design freedom of the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

  Here, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the driving device 464 is disposed. Therefore, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is lifted and tilted, so that the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward. Therefore, the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) serving as the fulcrum of the hanging member 430 to the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is shortened. Wobble of the bending arm 433 in the thickness direction of 430 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed in the vicinity of the driving device 464 (see FIG. 22), the force R in the rotational direction centering on the hanging cylinder 435 can be applied downward by gravity. The assisting member 450 is pulled by the connecting member 470 by the force R. At this time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives force in the direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved, and the sliding movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, so that the wobble of the other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450. As a result, the resistance to the wobble generated when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so that the tilting member 460 can be prevented from shaking. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the hanging member 430, all the vibration or wobble generated by the tilting member 460 is transmitted to the hanging member 430, but in the present embodiment, the vibration or wobble of the tilting member 460 is The suspension member 430 and the connection member 470 can be divided and transmitted. As a result, the rigidity of the suspension member 430 and the connection member 470 need not be set excessively, and the design freedom of the suspension member 430 and the connection member 470 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 28 illustrates a closed state in which the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be able to form a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33B) by rotating the reflecting member 520. Next, the entire configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

  FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded back perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 forming a frame, a reflecting member 520 supported by the axial support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510, and reflections thereof. A first cover member 530 having a pivot hole 531 in which the rotation shaft 522 of the member 520 is fitted, and a second cover member 540 attached to the second wall 513 of the base member 510 on the drive side of the reflection member 520; A transmission member 550 in which a first rack gear 553 engaged with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engraved, a drive device 560 generating a driving force for moving the transmission member 550, and transmission of the drive device 560 And a cover member 570 disposed on the rear side of the gear group 562 and fastened and fixed to the base member 510.

  The base member 510 has a rectangular opening at the center and a bottom surface portion 511 formed in a plane frame shape, and extends vertically from the right end of the bottom surface portion 511 to the front side and the back side of the bottom surface portion 511 And a second wall 513 extending vertically from the left end of the bottom surface 511 to the front side of the bottom surface 511. Note that the opening of the bottom portion 511 is an opening for arranging a base (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is emitted from the light source toward the reflecting member 520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). Ru.

  The bottom surface portion 511 is vertically extended in the right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 in a rear view (see FIG. 30), and includes a long slide hole 511 a for guiding the transmission member 550.

  A plurality of slide holes 511a (four places in this embodiment) are formed side by side in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30) of the bottom surface portion 511 in a mode in which the extending direction coincides with a straight line. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending from the lower end in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a, and is a long hole having a narrower width than the slide hole 511a and guides the rib portion 555 of the transmission member 550. Rib portion slide holes 511b are formed.

  Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a rotating shaft 511c which is provided with a plurality projecting toward the back side below the opening and on which the transmission gear group 562 of the drive device 560 is pivotally supported.

  The first wall portion 512 is a groove which is cut in a U-shape from the front side toward the back side, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft portion of the reflection member is formed. In addition, the arrangement | positioning space | interval of the axial support groove 512a is equal intervals, and is formed by the space | interval shorter than the width dimension (longitudinal direction view in the rotation axis direction) of the reflection member 520.

  The second wall portion 513 is disposed opposite to the shaft support groove 512a and is formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a, and a plurality of the shaft support grooves 513a are supported by adjacent shaft support grooves. And an extending portion 513b formed between the grooves 513a and extending from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (the front side in FIG. 29).

  The extension portion 513b is formed in a step shape in which the width dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 29) decreases toward the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the positioning projection portion 543 of the second lid member 540. Be fitted to.

  The reflecting member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of light emitted from the light source, and is in the form of a long plate-like main body 521 made of an opaque resin material, and straight from the left and right ends of the main body 521 A pair of rotary shafts 522 provided in a protruding manner, and a rotary gear 523 of which the rotary shafts 522 are made to coincide with each other on the side on which the transmission member 550 is disposed among the pair of rotary shafts 522. Prepare.

  The main body portion 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) chamfered on an end face in the width direction.

  The rotation shaft 522 is formed at a central position in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29) of the main body portion 521. Further, of the pair of rotary shafts 522, the rotary shaft 522 on the side on which the transmission member 550 is disposed is extended so that a second wall portion is formed between the rotary gear 523 and the main body portion 521. An arrangement 513 is formed.

  The rotary gear 523 includes expansion teeth 523a connected with adjacently-cut teeth and having a diameter from the center of rotation that is longer than the other teeth. The over-rotation of the reflecting member 520 can be prevented by the expansion teeth 523a.

  The first lid member 530 is a long plate-like member fastened and fixed in the thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 29) of the first wall portion 512, and a plurality of shafts through which the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is inserted. A portion vertically extending toward the first wall 512 along the support hole 531 and the front surface (the front surface in FIG. 29) of the first lid member 530, and the front side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531 And an extending lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end face circumscribing the edge of

  Here, for example, when the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness equal to or larger than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, as in the present embodiment, when the reversing operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, the first wall The thickness of the part 512 interferes, and it is difficult to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 integrally.

  On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed in the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the left and right direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the right wall of the reflection member 520 does not depend on the diameter of the head of the fastening screw It can be made thinner. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not disturb the operation of the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be easily viewed integrally. The effect can be improved.

  In addition, regarding the method of assembling the base member 510, the reflecting member 520, and the first lid member 530, at least two methods of assembling can be performed. For example, first, there is a method of fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the base member 510 in a state where the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is fitted into the pivoting grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510. According to this method, the reflecting member 520 can be inserted through the pivot support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at one time.

  Second, in a state in which the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotation shaft 522 on the opposite side to the drive portion side of the reflecting member 520 is the pivot support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 There is a method of fitting the rotation shaft 522 on the drive portion side into the axial support groove 513a of the second wall portion 512 after inserting in a diagonal direction (direction from the front side toward the diagonal right back).

  With reference to FIG. 31, the fitting relationship of the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512, the first cover member 530, and the reflection member 520 will be described. 31 (a) is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 along line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). In FIG. 31A, the side surface on which the first lid member 530 is fastened is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the depth of the axial support groove 512a of the first wall 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520. Therefore, even in the case where the pivoting hole 531 is not formed in the first lid member 530, for example, the reflecting member 520 is the pivoting groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extending lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530. It is positioned between and and pivotally supported.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the depth of the pivoting groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the pivoting hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed identical. Therefore, as described above, the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is pivotally supported between the pivot groove 512a of the first wall 512 and the extended lid 532 of the first lid 530, and the first lid It is also pivotally supported by the pivotal support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31 (b)).

  Therefore, a large area for pivotally supporting the rotation shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 can be secured. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

  That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to secure a sufficient area of the pivot groove 512a for pivotally supporting the reflection member 520 as it is. Therefore, the shaft support hole 531 is formed in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is also supported by the shaft support hole 531. Thereby, the space which the 1st lid member 530 and the 1st wall 512 occupy in the axial direction of reflective member 520 can be used effectively, and the area which pivotally supports reflective member 520 can fully be secured.

  Referring back to FIG. The second lid member 540 is a member for pivotally supporting the drive portion side of the reflection member 520 on the base member 510, and is a base member 541 in the form of a long plate disposed on the front side most and the base member 541 thereof. 30. It is provided in a protruding manner in such a manner as to connect the extended shaft support 542 and the base member 541 with the extended shaft support 542 protruding from the back toward the back side and extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30). And a positioning protrusion 543.

  The engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc in FIG. 32 (b); FIG. 32 (d) is a portion of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. 32 (b) FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the plurality of positioning projections 543 of the second lid member 540 are respectively fitted between the adjacent extension portions 513 b of the base member 510. As a result, the second lid member 540 can be accurately aligned with the base member 510 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 32B).

  Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in a long plate shape, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and the second wall portion 513 is bent in the thickness direction, so that the axial direction of the reflecting member 520 is obtained. The rotation force of the reflecting member 520 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32C, in the present embodiment, the extending shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 is located in the thickness direction of the extending portion 513b of the base member 510 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 32C). Be touched. Thereby, the rigidity in the thickness direction of the second wall 513 can be improved.

  The end in the extending direction of the extension support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 abuts against the end where the support groove 513a of the base member 510 is formed, and the open end of the support groove 513a is closed (see FIG. See FIG. 32 (d)). Thus, the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is axially supported by the hole formed by the axial support groove 513a and the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32B).

  Referring back to FIG. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the drive device 560 to the reflection member 520, and is formed in an elongated plate shape and is in contact with the back surface of the bottom surface 511 of the base member 510. And 551 and an elongated plate-shaped extended wall portion 552 extending from the end face (the left end face in FIG. 29) of the main body 551 to the front side and an end face on the front side of the extended wall 552 A first rack gear 553 which is engraved and meshed with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, and a plurality (four in the present embodiment) are disposed on the front side of the main body 551 and the slide of the base member 510 The slide shafts 554 connected to the holes 511a and the slide shafts 554 of the upper and lower ends of the slide shafts 554 extend downward from the rib portion slide holes 511b of the base member 510 (see FIG. 30) It includes a rib portion 555 which is protruded in a small width dimension slightly larger than the width dimension, a second rack gear 556 which is meshed with the transmission gear group of the driving device 560 while being engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551, a.

  In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of teeth groups in which four teeth are connected are provided at intervals slightly shorter than the interval when one tooth is omitted. Although the space spaced from each other can prevent the excessive rotation of the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, the details will be described later.

  The driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force, and is engaged with a driving gear 561 axially supported by the driving shaft, a gear engaged with the driving gear 561, and a second rack gear 556 of the transmission member 550. And a plurality of gears including a plurality of gears, each of which includes a transmission gear group 562 engaged with the plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

  When the drive gear 561 of the drive device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated, and the drive force of the drive device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid in the extending direction of the slide hole 511 a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the drive device 560. Since the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is engaged with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the reflection member 520 is rotated about the rotation shaft 522 by sliding movement of the transmission member 550.

  FIGS. 33 (a), 33 (b) and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 showing the rotating operation of the reflecting member 520 in time series, and FIGS. (E) and FIG. 33 (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotational operation of the reflecting member 520 in time series, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the reflecting member 520 in the posture of FIG. FIG. 16 is a partial side view of the transmission member 550.

  In FIG. 33, the second lid member 540 is not shown, and in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), a state (closed state) in which the main portions 521 of the reflection member 520 abut each other is shown. 33 (b) and 33 (e), a state (open state) in which the reflecting member 520 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) is illustrated. And FIG. 33 (f), the surface opposite to the surface facing the front in FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. 33 (d) is directed to the front and the main body of the reflecting member 520). A state (closed state) in which the members 521 abut on each other is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (d), in the closed state, the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engaged with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 to be restricted in rotation.

  The rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (leftward in FIG. 33D) by the drive device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33D, the rotating gear 523 of the reflection member 520 Is rotated, and the main body 521 of the reflection member 520 is rotated (see FIG. 33E). Further, the first rack gear 553 is slid to the left, so that the reflecting members 520 are rotated until the surfaces in the thickness direction abut each other, and the transmitting member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33F).

  Here, at the end position of the sliding movement of the transmission member 550, the reflecting member 520 is abutted at the end to correct the posture (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 are not meshed accurately, the posture of the reflection member 520 in the state where the transmission member 550 is disposed at the end position of slide movement. Can be stabilized.

  In the closed state, the reflecting member 520 abuts the end of the main body 521 in the thickness direction. At this time, since the region between the first wall 512 and the second wall 513 of the base member 510 is closed to the reflecting member 520, the light irradiated from the light source described above can be blocked by the reflecting member 520. it can.

  Here, the suppression of the light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-like shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light irradiated to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is completely opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, while the shutter member is slidingly moved from the state where the shutter member is disposed between the light irradiated to the player and the player, it is not possible to visually recognize the light overlapping the shutter member. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light is extended.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflection member 520 makes it possible to pass the light irradiated to the player by rotating the reflection member 520 from the closed state while suppressing the light leakage in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members 520 may have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, the respective reflecting members 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter members. Therefore, as compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the time for the player to visually recognize the entire light can be shortened in the case where the reflective member 520 is rotated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light source formed on the back side of the reflection member is configured such that the area occupied by the reflection member 520 in a front view (see FIG. 32A) is reduced by the rotation of the reflection member 520. The light of the light becomes visible. Therefore, the installation space of the reflective operation unit 500 can be saved.

  In the closed state, the reflecting members 520 abut the chamfered portions 521 a (see FIG. 34). Thereby, the space | interval of the thickness direction of the reflection members 520 in a thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed of the several reflection member 520 can be planarized more.

  For example, in the case where a pattern recognized as one on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflection members 520 is formed on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflection members 520, the boundary between the adjacent reflection members 520 is made inconspicuous. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the pattern can be more clearly recognized.

  The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer end of the expansion tooth 523a is longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, if it is attempted to rotate the rotary gear 523 counterclockwise in FIG. 33D from the state of FIG. 33A, the expansion tooth 523a is blocked by the main body 551 and can not be rotated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the excessive rotation of the reflecting member 520, and to prevent the pressure of the contact surface of the reflecting member 520 from being excessively generated, thereby preventing the reflecting member 520 from being broken.

  Further, as described above, since the first rack gear 553 is disposed at an interval slightly shorter than the interval in the case where a group of teeth in which four teeth are continuously provided omit one tooth, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), the teeth of the rotating gear 523 are formed between the teeth of the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550. When the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated clockwise in FIG. Get stuck. In this case, the rotary gear 523 can not be rotated further. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflecting member 520 from being damaged by the chamfered portion 521a which is the contact surface due to the excessive rotation of the reflecting member 520.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. 35 (a) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 35 (b), the pair of first slide members 720 is shown. And the state where a pair of 2nd slide members 740 are arranged at the projection position (front side of display field P of the 3rd symbol display device 81, refer to Drawing 2) is illustrated.

  In the second slide operation unit 700, the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the display area. It is formed to be able to divide P into a grid. Next, the entire configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

  36 and 37 are exploded front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are exploded rear perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. In FIGS. 36 and 38, the base member 710 and the members disposed on the front side of the base member 710 are shown disassembled, and in FIGS. 37 and 39, the back surfaces of the base member 710 and the base member 710 are shown. The state where the member disposed on the side is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second slide operation unit 700 has a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening forming the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 at the center. 710, a first slide shaft S1 fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the base member 710 and having its longitudinal direction aligned with the horizontal direction, and a slide along the first slide shaft S1 A pair of first slide members 720 to be moved, and a front side cover member 730 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720 and which is formed by a pair of upper and lower Prepare.

  Further, the second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710 and has the second slide shaft S2 whose longitudinal direction coincides with the vertical direction, and its second slide shaft. A pair of second slide members 740 slidingly moved along the rod S 2, a transmission device 750 in which a plurality of gears engaged with the second slide members 740 are disposed, and a pair of second slide members 740 And a rear cover member 760 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the rear side of the transmission device 750 and is formed on the left, right, and upper portions, and the first slide member 720 disposed on the rear cover member 760 And a drive device 770 for generating a driving force for sliding the second slide member 740.

  As shown in FIG. 36, since the first slide member 720 is formed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one of them (the left in FIG. 36) will be described here, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  The first slide member 720 is extended downward from the lower end of the main body 721 formed in a plate shape of a front view L-shape, the carriage 722 fastened and fixed to the main body 721, and the carriage 722 And a decorative portion 723.

  The main body portion 721 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the left-right direction and has a rack portion 721a having a rack gear engraved on the upper surface, and a lower portion of the rack portion 721a. And a plate-shaped carriage receiving portion 721b disposed on the left side in a front view.

  The carriage portion 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the carriage receiving portion 721b with the left end aligned with the left end of the carriage receiving portion 721b. The carriage portion 722 is disposed inward of the carriage main body portion 722a, which is formed in a U-shape in cross section by the wall portions respectively projecting from the upper and lower ends of the plate-like bottom to the front side And a rotating body group 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed to have a rotation axis perpendicular to the bottom surface is disposed as a left and right pair.

  The pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are disposed in parallel in the left and right direction, and the length of the upper and lower intervals is formed slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft rod S1. The rotating body group 722b is disposed so as to slightly extend outward from the side surface in the longitudinal direction (right and left side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the bogie main body 722a.

  The first slide shaft rod S1 has a pair of fastening plates S1a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends and is formed of a metal material such as stainless steel.

  The arrangement of the first slide member 720 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft rod S1 is inserted between the rotating member group 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in that state. Thus, the carriage portion 722a is disposed between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft S1. Further, the base member 710 is thereby reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft S1.

  Subsequently, the carriage receiving portion 721b of the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 are fastened and fixed. Thus, the first slide member 720 is slidably supported by the first slide shaft rod S1.

  In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is engaged with the transmission gear engaged with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the drive force of the drive device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, whereby the first slide member 720 is slid to the left and right.

  At the time of sliding movement of the first slide member 720, since the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft rod S1, the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft rod S1 can be reduced and friction is reduced. Further, since the pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are disposed in the left and right pair and they are in contact with the first slide shaft rod S1, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the first slide member 720 at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft bar S1 can be stabilized.

  The front cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is disposed on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is disposed on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. Thereby, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (forward direction in FIG. 36) with the first slide shaft S1 as an axis, wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710 in the rear view left side, and transmission cylinders 711 and 712 which are disposed penetrating in the front-rear direction and formed so as to be pivotable. And a fixed gear portion 713 in which a gear is engraved on a wall surface facing inward (right in FIG. 38), and a rack gear 754 meshed with the fixed gear portion 713 (see FIG. 39) and a guide wall 715 projecting from the back of the base member 710 in the right side in a rear view and extending in the vertical direction. And mainly.

  The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 include drive gears 711 a and 712 a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed, and are members for transmitting the drive force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720.

  The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a engraved on a wall surface facing inward (left in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is configured by a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one of them (upper side in FIG. 37) will be described here, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  The second slide member 740 is extended leftward from the front end left end of the carriage portion 742 of the body portion 741 formed in a long plate shape, the carriage portion 742 fastened and fixed to the body portion 741 And a decorative portion 743.

  The main body 741 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

  The carriage portion 742 has its upper end aligned with the upper end of the main body portion 741 and is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body portion 741. The carriage portion 742 is formed with a carriage body portion 742a formed in a U-shaped cross section by the wall portions protruding from the left and right ends of the bottom surface of the plate to the front side, and the inward of the carriage body portion 742a is perpendicular to the bottom surface And a rotating body group 742b in which a pair of left and right rotating bodies formed to have a rotating shaft is disposed in a pair at the top and the bottom.

  The rotating body group 742b has a pair of left and right rotating bodies arranged vertically in parallel, and the length of the left and right space is formed slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft rod S2.

  The decorative portion 743 is provided with a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a pivotally supported on a shaft protruding toward the back surface at an end on the left in front view.

  The second slide shaft rod S2 includes a pair of fastening plates S2a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

  The arrangement of the second slide member 740 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S2 is inserted between the rotating body group 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the carriage 742. As a result, the second slide member 740 is slidably supported by the second slide shaft S2. Further, the base member 710 is thereby reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft S2.

  Then, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft rod S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. Thus, the main body 741 is disposed between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft bar S2.

  Here, the rack gear inscribed from the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 meshes with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 slides up and down.

  At the time of sliding movement of the second slide member 740, since the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft rod S2, the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft rod S2 can be reduced and friction is reduced. In addition, since a pair of left and right rotating bodies are disposed in a pair at the top and bottom and they are in contact with the second slide shaft rod S2, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the second slide member 740 at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft S2 can be stabilized.

  Here, the main body portion 741 having a rack gear engaged with the rolling gear 714 (drive portion side) and the carriage portion 742 sandwiching the second slide shaft rod S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740 Formed at the end. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the deflection of the second slide member 740 around the second slide shaft S2 affects the meshing state of the rack gear and the rolling gear 714. Therefore, the resistance which the 2nd slide member 740 receives by the shift | offset | difference of a meshing state can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device for transmitting the driving force of the drive device 770 to the second slide member 740, and on the back side of the long plate-shaped main body portion 751 and the main body portion 751. A drive gear 752, which is disposed and to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive unit 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 engaged with the drive gear 752, and teeth engaged with the transmission gear A rack gear 754 is mainly provided, which is a long plate-shaped member extending in a direction and is slid along the slide long holes 751 a of the main body 751 in the vertical direction.

  In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one of the upper and lower parts (see FIG. 39) will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  The main body portion 751 includes a slide long hole 751 a drilled in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

  The rack gear 754 is provided with a columnar support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) which is vertically protruded from the front and penetrates the slide long hole 751a of the main body 751. The bearing portion 754 a is inserted into the bearing hole of the rolling gear 714.

  Here, a transmission mode of the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is rotated through the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide long hole 751a.

  The shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of the rack gear 754 is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, and therefore the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down by sliding the rack gear 754 up and down. .

  At this time, the rolling gear 714 is engaged with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710, and also engaged with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 disposed opposite to the fixed gear portion 713. That is, a double rack and pinion mechanism is formed by the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741, and the second slide member 740 is moved at double speed relative to the rack gear 754.

  The rear cover member 760 includes a rear drive cover member 761 disposed on the drive side of the second slide member 740, a rear upper cover member 762 disposed on the top, a rear drive cover member 761, and left and right. And a back surface retaining cover member 763 disposed opposite to the direction.

  The back drive cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the transmission device 750, and drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back.

  The back upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710, and drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

  The back surface retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back surface of the extending end of the decorative portion 743, and prevents the second slide member 740 from rotating to the back side with the second slide shaft rod S2 as a fulcrum and coming off.

  The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740. The drive motors 771, 772, 773, and 774 have drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, and 774a, respectively.

  One example of the movement of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of the change in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in time series.

  The state in which the pair of first slide members 720 is disposed at the retracted position in FIG. 40 (a) corresponds to the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 in FIG. In FIG. 40 (c), the state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved by a predetermined amount from the position of FIG. 40 (b) to the right in the front view is illustrated in FIG. In FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the upper front cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front cover members 730 is not shown.

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the drive gears 711a and 712a at the time of sliding movement of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A (the drive gear 711a rotates clockwise in a front view and the drive gear 712a rotates counterclockwise in a front view), the pair of first slide members 720 is rotated. Are respectively slid toward the overhanging position and abutted in the overhanging position (see FIG. 40 (b)).

  A drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) for generating a driving force for sliding the first slide member 720 disposed on the right in front view, of the pair of first slide members 720, is in the state of FIG. 40 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before reaching the end. In the present embodiment, since the abutment of the pair of first slide members 720 is generated between the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main portion 722a of the carriage 722, it is not necessary to consider the bending of the decorative portion 723 in the sliding direction. Thus, the contact position of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

  The pair of first slide members 720 are disposed so that the rotating body group 722b slightly protrudes outward from the side surface (right and left side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a, so the pair of first slide members 720 abut At the time of rotation, the rotating bodies projecting outward from the contact surface side in the rotating body group 722b are first brought into contact with each other, and then the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main portion 722a of the carriage 722 are pressed. Be That is, while the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main portion 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating members projecting outward from the contact surface side in the rotating body group 722b. Thus, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in a state in which the pair of slide members 720 is in contact with each other, so that the impact when the pair of first slide members 720 is in contact can be alleviated.

  The drive motor 771 generates a driving force for sliding the first slide member 720 disposed on the left of the front view of the pair of first slide members 720 after being in contact with the pair of first slide members 720. By the driving force (see FIG. 35) (when the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side in front view is pushed to the first slide member 720 disposed on the left side in front view), the pair of first slides The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40C).

  That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid without causing the drive motors 771 and 772 to cooperate with each other. As a result, the power consumption of the entire drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

  Also, for example, when driving the pair of first slide members 720 only with the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load is increased more than when only one of the first slide members 720 is driven. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, it is not necessary to consider the gravity load as in the case of the vertical movement, and the increase amount of the motor load is the drive motor 771, 772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs equally in each.

  Therefore, the motor life of the drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35) can be easily adjusted, and adjustment of the replacement timing of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be facilitated. Thereby, the maintenance frequency of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

  An example of the movement of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of the change in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in time series.

  The state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the retracted position in FIG. 41 (a) is the projecting position of the main body portions 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 in FIG. 41 (b). In FIG. 41C, the state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are moved by a predetermined amount upward in a front view from the position of FIG. 41B is illustrated in FIG.

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the drive gear 752 (see FIG. 39) at the time of sliding movement of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a), the drive gear 752 is rotated by the drive motors 773, 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 rotates clockwise and the drive motor 774 rotates counterclockwise). The pair of second slide members 740 are respectively slid toward the overhanging position and abutted in the overhanging position (see FIG. 41B).

  Of the pair of second slide members 740, the drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) for generating a driving force for sliding the second slide member 740 disposed above in the front view reaches the state of FIG. 41 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before.

  The drive motor 774 for generating a driving force for sliding the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 after being in contact with the pair of second slide members 740. 35) (with the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view being pushed by the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view) by the driving force of FIG. It is slid upward (see FIG. 41 (c)).

  That is, after the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid and moved without cooperative operation of the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35). As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of power consumption seen by the entire drive motor 773, 774.

  Here, when the downward moving member changes the moving direction upward, the load on the drive motor may increase due to the influence of gravity, which may reduce the life of the motor. Moreover, since the deceleration time for direction change takes a long time, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of the effect is reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes the moving direction upward from the downward movement, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 is lifted. You can use the momentum of movement. As a result, the motor load generated when the second slide member 740 turns can be reduced due to the influence of gravity, and the motor life can be extended. In addition, the deceleration time for changing the direction of the second slide member 740 can be shortened, and the freedom of presentation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, an operation of the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. The back surface retaining cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back surface side cover member 760 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the second slide member 740, the end opposite to the end supported by the second slide shaft S2 contacts the receiving gear portion 715a of the base member 710 via the deflection suppressing gear 743a. Be touched.

  Here, at the time of starting of the second slide member 740, the meshing relationship between the deflection suppressing gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized and the deflection suppressing gear 743a is smoothly rotated, so the second slide member 740 and the receiving gear The resistance generated between itself and the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required for starting the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other by the carriage portions 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decorative portion 743 and the side on which the deflection suppressing gear 743 a of the decorative portion 743 is disposed The end of the is inclined relative to the guiding wall 715. As a result, the load from the deflection suppressing gear 743 a to the receiving gear portion 715 is increased. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is tilted downward (downward in FIG. 42) with the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper deflection suppressing gear 743a of the pair of deflection suppressing gears 743a is received. It is pushed to the part 715.

  Thereby, a force in the direction to return the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 caused by the contact of the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

  Further, the contact surface between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 can be increased by meshing the gears. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a slip between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 abut, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 is suppressed. Can improve the effect.

<About the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 1st embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. The first variable winning device 65 is, as shown in FIG. 49, combined with an opening forming member 65b disposed to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b, the first variable winning device 65 is first variable. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and a back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c Opening and closing for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d, an LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover 65e for holding the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g which is combined with the back side of the back carver body 65e to form a flow path, and the back cover body 65e It is disposed on the back side of a flow path cover 65g, a switching member 65h which protrudes to the flow path formed by the cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the gaming ball, a link member 65i which is engaged with the switching member 65h Back cover body 65j, and a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and cover the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side by screws on the back cover body 65j It is comprised with the cover body 65m for fixation for fixing.

  FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. FIG. 50 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which game balls can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the gaming ball passing through the opening is guided in the left direction of FIG. 50 (b). The bottom is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 formed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of the game ball is disposed. The gaming ball having passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the sorting flow path formed on the back side of the back cover 65e shown in FIG. 51 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state where the game ball can enter the ball by the open / close door 65f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can appear from the game board 13 side. It is changed to a possible (closed difficulty) closed state. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper part of the open / close door. Further, in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  By configuring in this manner, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning opening 640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning port 640 while right-handed even during a time-saving game (including a probability variation game), and the game method is immediately left-handed after a big hit game. It is possible to reduce the time and effort to change. Therefore, it is possible to play the game more easily.

  Further, in the open state, a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so more gaming balls can be efficiently won in the specified winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view of La-La shown in FIG. 50 (b). As shown in FIG. 50A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow channel of the back cover 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow channel 65e1 and a special discharge flow channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a rear view of the back cover 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge opening 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and a flow path cover 65g Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the passage cover body 65g is provided with an opening portion through which the induction piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the passage cover body 65g into the flow passage. It is possible to arrange as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the gaming ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 disposed obliquely downward to the left and is guided to the special discharge port 65e2 . The game ball which has passed the special discharge port 65e2 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball by being detected by a probability change switch 65e3 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2. .

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, so that the gaming state after the big hit game is the high probability gaming state Game state) is set. That is, the probability changing switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability changing gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the gaming state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the definite variation gaming state.

  As described above, since the gaming state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow-down route of the gaming ball that has won the first variable winning hole 65 during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game Can. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the induction piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is at least one second. . The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the thirteenth round. When the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the thirteenth round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability change switch 65e3 It is done. Therefore, the probability variation application rate can be controlled by the jackpot type, and it can be configured such that advantages and disadvantages do not occur excessively.

  A case where the gaming ball is guided to the normal discharge opening 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a view showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inoperative and the opening piece of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The gaming balls guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 are guided to the upper surface of the induction piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 formed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether all the game balls entered into the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect in which even if the jackpot B is a jackpot B, the probability changing switch 65e3 is a jackpot even in the jackpot B in a state where the gaming ball that has won a prize before the 13th round is not discharged.

  As described above, the gaming ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on that, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, against the one ball winning) (15 balls) can be paid out. In addition, it is possible to execute lottery of whether or not to apply the probability variation gaming state by configuring whether or not to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 using the gaming ball after the detection is possible . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the relationship between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 will be described. On the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, an opening where one game ball can pass is formed, and the game ball passing through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65 A guiding path is formed which leads to the general winning opening 65b1. When the game ball enters the general winning opening 65b1, ten game balls are paid out to the upper plate as a winning ball for the player. Here, in the case where the game ball is played by right-handling, which is a game method in which the game ball is fired so as to pass through the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, it does not roll on the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 The game balls rolling on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 are all configured to pass through the opening and win the general winning opening 65b1. At the upper part of the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of game nails for changing the rolling direction of the game balls are provided.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the open / close door 65f1 is in the open state, the angle of the game nails K2 and K3 is adjusted as a means for adjusting the ratio to the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval is narrowed. It is configured to be able to spread or Here, the game arcade tries to increase profits by increasing the number of game balls to be launched to 10 balls in one round by reducing the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening 65a at the time of big hit It is possible to do. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the game nail K2 is inclined leftward to make it difficult to win the specific winning opening 65a, the interval between the adjustment nails K1 and K2 becomes wide, and the right opening of the open / close door 65f1 It becomes easy to enter the ball. Further, to narrow the gap between the game nails K1 and K2, if the game nail K1 is narrowed, the flow path on the right side of the game nail K1 becomes wider, and the game ball enters from the right side opening of the open / close door 65f1 from the flow path It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, even when the jackpot is not being played, the ratio of winning in the general winning opening 65b1 increases, and the damage on the gaming shop side increases, so that the ratio of winning in the specific winning opening 65a is reduced. It can control that a nail is adjusted. Therefore, the adjustment by the game arcade side can suppress the problem that the taste of the game is significantly reduced.

  In addition, by tilting the game nail K1 to the right, the space between the game nails K2 and K3 can be narrowed to adjust the winning rate to the specific winning hole 65a, the game ball to the second winning hole 640 side can be adjusted. Is easy to flow down. As a result, the winning rate to the second winning opening 640 becomes high, the ratio of winning to the second winning opening 640 becomes high during the short time game or during the odd gaming state, and the damage on the gaming shop side becomes large. It can be suppressed that the winning rate of the specific winning hole 65a is set low. A plurality of game nails are arranged between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640, and the game ball which has flowed down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is All are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640. The gaming nails disposed between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 are arranged such that all gaming balls are guided to the second winning opening 640 even if adjusted.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. First, the rocking operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG.

  The first embodiment has described the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed with each other, but the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment includes the transmission device 2350 and the drive device 2340. A state in which the drive gear 2341 meshes (engagement state) and a state in which the transmission gear 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are disengaged (disengagement state) can be formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 43 and 44 are front views of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350 and the L-shaped lever 2380, which illustrate the rocking operation of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350 and the L-shaped lever 2380 in time series in the second embodiment. FIG.

  The main body portion 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 43 (b), the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position in FIG. In FIG. 43 (c), the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position in FIG. 43 (a). The state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c) is the state in which the arm member 320 is extended to the front of the extended position in FIG. In the drawing, the state in which the arm member 320 is disposed in the extended position by the transmission device 2350 being pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are formed to be able to mesh with each other.

  The drive gear 2341 includes a main body portion 2341 a that is axially viewed by the drive shaft and formed in a fan shape in a front view, and a push pin 2341 b that protrudes on the front side in the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the main body portion 2341 a.

  The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 protruding toward the front side at the end on the opposite side of the restricting sliding portion 351 in the front view.

  The base member 2310 is provided with a swinging shaft 2318 that protrudes to the front side at the lower right of the support position of the drive gear 2341 in a front view.

  The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in a long rod shape and has a first main portion 2381 swingably pivotally supported at one end on the swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310, and one end of the first main portion 2381 The second main body portion 2382 which is pivotally supported at the other end on the opposite side and is formed in a long rod shape and is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second main body portion 2382 And a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is connected. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed swingably on the front side of the drive gear 2341 and is formed to be able to abut on the push pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

  The case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. In the arm member 320, the transmission device 2350 connected by the release hole 325 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c) by the rotation of the drive gear 2341, whereby the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled toward the transmission device side by pulling the pull slide hole 2383 by the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 43 (c), the coupling between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position will be described.

  In the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 43C), the restriction sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point. The arm member 320 is maintained at the retracted position even when the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the drive gear 2341 is released.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) and the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (right in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is transmitted to the pull slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. The release pin 2352 is pulled, and the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in front view.

  The transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated, so that the dead point formed by the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 is a torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). It is swung toward the overhanging position by the biasing force of)) (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341 b is disposed to the right of the rotation shaft, the L-shaped lever 2380 pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350 again. As a result, the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and the arm member 320 can be maintained at the extended position (see FIG. 44C).

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position, the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 connected to the arm member 320 can be released, and the arm member 320 The resistance applied can be reduced. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 by the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the action of swinging the arm member 320 at high speed from the start can be made remarkable.

  Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are engaged only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance generated between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320 Does not affect the swing of the arm member 320 when it is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

  Therefore, by setting the elastic force of the torsion spring 360 large, even if the large force is required to swing the arm member 320 from the extended position to the retracted position, the capacity of the drive device 2340 is selected large. The high speed at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position can be secured.

  FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a) and 46 (b) illustrate the operation in which the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position in time series. It is a front view of rocking movement unit 2300 in a form. 45 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 45 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. 46 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 45 (b), and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position. Be done.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the raising member 330 is gently raised is described, but in the rocking operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the raising member 330 is sharply raised.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the upstanding holes 2316 of the base member 2310 are provided with a posture change portion 2316a formed in the upper part of the bending point and a concentric part 2316b formed in the vicinity of the lower end.

  The posture change portion 2316 a is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 which is the swing shaft of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the raising member 330 slides on the posture changing portion 2316a, the degree of the posture change of the rising member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. See (a)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

  The concentric circle portion 2316 b is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed in a direction along a circle centered on the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the change sliding part 333 of the rising member 330 slides on the concentric part 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring part 323 of the arm member 320 and the change sliding part 333 of the rising member 330 does not change. The posture of the rising member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, since the concentric portion 2316 b is formed at the lower end of the standing hole 2316, the standing relative to the arm member 320 is performed until the arm member 320 is disposed in the position illustrated in FIG. The relative attitude of the members 330 is maintained.

  Since the posture change portion 2316a is formed on the upper part of the bending point of the standing hole 2316 (that is, in the vicinity of the upper part of the concentric portion 2316b), the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b) When the arm member 320 is swung to the vertical position, the rising member 320 is sharply raised.

  As a result, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made rapid. Therefore, the speed of operation of the rocking operation unit 2300 felt by the player can be further improved.

  The first slide operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Although the case where the connection member 470 is formed of a resin material has been described in the first embodiment, in the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the connection member 2470 is formed of an elastic rubber material. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 47 (a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. In FIG. 47, the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 is provided with a mass portion 2466m disposed at the upper end.

  The mass portion 2466 m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461 a in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461a.

  The connecting shaft 461 b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the hanging shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connecting member 2470.

  The connecting member 2470 is an elongated member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed so as to be expandable and contractible by the swinging of the tilting member 2460.

  Here, since the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461a in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the tilting member 2460 is formed unstable. Therefore, when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 performs expansion and contraction in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the tilting member 2460 swings about the hanging shaft 461a. Be moved.

  In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. Thus, a force opposite to the swinging direction of the tilting member 2460 is loaded on the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time until the swinging back of the tilting member 2460 is shortened, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is speeded up. Therefore, the speed of the rocking movement of the tilting member 2460 which occurs when the drive device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven can be increased, and the effect by the rocking (vibration) of the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

  The second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and abuts on the other first slide member 720 has been described, but the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment is The position and velocity of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and control is performed so that one first slide member 2720 reversely travels according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment, illustrating an example of an operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid and moved from the retracted position to the extended position. In FIG. 48, the upper front side cover member 730 is not shown, and in FIG. 48 (a), the pair of first slide members 2720 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 48 (b) Shows a state in which the first slide member 2720 on the right side of the pair of first slide members 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount, and in FIG. 48C, the first slide on the left side from the state of FIG. A state in which the member 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body 2721 of the first slide member 2720 has a length that is drilled in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48) and extends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 48). A hole-shaped detection hole 2721 c is provided.

  The base member 2710 is a transmission-type optical sensor disposed on the front side, and the detection device is disposed at a position where transmitted light can penetrate the detection hole 2721 c by sliding movement of the first slide member 2720. 2716 is provided. The detection device 2716 is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base member 2710 (see FIG. 48A).

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), when the first slide member 2720 on the right side is slid from the state of FIG. 48 (a) and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position where it penetrates the detection hole 2721c, the right side The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

  As shown in FIG. 48C, when the first slide member 2720 on the left side is slid and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches a position passing through the detection hole 2721 c, the slide member 2720 on the right side slides on the left side. It is controlled to perform reverse feed (sliding movement to the right) at a speed that can be abutted with 2720 at a constant velocity.

  That is, while the left slide member 2720 slides, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720 blocks the transmitted light of the detection device 2716, but the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 cuts the detection hole 2721c. When reaching the penetrating position, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected, and the position information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721 c is formed in the shape of a long hole, by detecting the length of the detection device 2716 for detecting the transmitted light, the speed information of the first slide member 2720 on the left side is output to the main control device. Ru.

  Based on the position information and velocity information of the left first slide member 2720, the acceleration of the reverse feed necessary for the right first slide member 2720 to abut on the left first slide member 2720 at the same speed The acceleration is controlled so that the first slide member 2720 on the right side is calculated.

  Thereby, the impact at the time of contact of the pair of first slide members 2720 can be alleviated, and the durability of the first slide member 2720 can be improved.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  Although the case where the change sliding part 333 of the rising member 330 slides in the rising holes 316 and 2316 has been described in the above embodiments, this is not necessarily the case. For example, a rotatable roller may be disposed in the change sliding portion 333, and the roller may roll on the rising holes 316 and 2316. Thereby, the resistance which generate | occur | produces at the time of attitude | position change of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 gradually decreases from near the lower end to near the upper end of the guide hole 315 Although the case where it forms is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the dimensions of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be sharply changed in a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of degrees of change of the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (rapidly or loosely).

  In the above embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 gradually decreases from near the lower end to near the upper end of the guide hole 315 Although the case where it forms is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, even if the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 331 of the rising member 330 and the collar member and the base member 310 gradually decreases from near the lower end to near the upper end of the rising hole 316 Good. In this case, the resistance applied to the rising member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 starts from the retracted position to the extended position, and the wobble of the rising member 330 is suppressed in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position. can do.

  Although the case where the dimension of the clearance gap formed between the main-body part 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member, and the base member 310 was changed was demonstrated in said each embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end toward the upper end. In this case, the degree of reduction of the diameter orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 can be formed differently with respect to the center of the sliding portion 326.

  That is, the right side surface (right side in FIG. 18A) of the guide hole 315 is a portion formed on the upper side of the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. Since the arm member 320 slightly abuts against the swing shaft in the surface direction of the base member 310 (the direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) when being moved, Swinging of the arm member 320 in the extension direction can be smoothed by greatly reducing the degree of reduction of the groove width from the stage close to the retracted position.

  On the other hand, the left side surface (the left side in FIG. 18A) of the guide hole 315 abuts against the arm member 320 when it is swung from the extended position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 tilts forward. Therefore, by reducing the degree of reduction of the groove to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 and forming it sharply near the upper end, the resistance received when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position is obtained. It can be suppressed. That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 tilts forward, the sliding portion 326 can be prevented from contacting the left side surface of the guide hole 315. The resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive device 340 can be reduced, and the drive device 340 can be miniaturized.

  The same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 depending on the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, by increasing the diameter from the rocking shaft 312 in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 compared with the vicinity of the upper end, from the time of starting when the arm member 320 is rocked from the retracted position to the overhanging position The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. Thereby, the swing of the arm member 320 can be smoothed.

  Further, by increasing the diameter from the swinging shaft 312 in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 compared with the lower end, the arm member 320 is arranged from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315 in the state of being disposed at the extended position. A downward force acts on the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. As a result, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position.

  In the above embodiments, the case where all the reflecting members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are simultaneously rotated has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the timing of rotation may be shifted or the speed of rotation may be shifted for each of the reflecting members 520. Thereby, the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light source and reflected by the reflection member 520 can be set variously, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be rendered glittering.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflective member 520 is rotated by meshing the rotary gear 523 of the reflective member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 has been described. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotating belt, and the rotating gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotating belt further rotates in a state where the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other, a slip occurs between the rotating belt and the roller, and the further rotation of the reflecting member 520 is suppressed. Thus, damage to the reflective member 520 can be prevented.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the expansion gear teeth 523a are formed on the rotary gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed at an interval is described. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523 a may be formed on the transmission member 550 and the tooth spacing may be formed on the rotating gear 523.

  Although the case where the reflective member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed of an opaque resin material has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reflective member 520 may be formed of a transparent resin material. In this case, regardless of whether the reflecting member 520 is in the closed state or in the open state, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light source, so the player can visually recognize the effect by the light emitted from the light source for a long time Can.

  Although the case where one slide member 720 of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700 is pushed and slid by the other slide member 720 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed so as to always be driven by an independent drive motor.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the pair of second slide members 740 directly abut the main body portions 741 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, elastic members such as rubber and a coil spring may be disposed on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, since the impact can be mitigated as compared with the case where the main body portions 741 are in direct contact with each other, the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

  In the above embodiments, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 project. It is not limited. For example, the shape to be visually recognized is not limited to the "heart", and may be, for example, a "star", a "fish" or a "car". In addition, when the degree of extension of the slide members 720 and 740 is different, different shapes may be formed so as to be visible. In this case, the rendering effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

  Although the case where one second slide member 740 of the pair of second slide members 740 pushes and moves the other second slide member 740 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, by attaching a magnet to the contact point of the second slide member 740, it can be moved in the pulling direction. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides the one second slide member 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, the drive motor can be switched according to the situation, such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the service life of the pair of drive motors 773 and 774 can be adjusted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 abut upon contact of the pair of first slide members 720 has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, the lower end side opposite to the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted among both ends in the longitudinal direction of the decorative portion 723 . In this case, since the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 abut can be mitigated, the load on the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 abut upon contact of the pair of first slide members 720 has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area when the pair of first slide members 720 is in contact can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is reliably transmitted to the other, when sliding the pair of first slide members 720 in a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 abut, the pair of slide members 720 It is possible to make the effect of making the visual recognition as one unit remarkable. At this time, when the contact points on both sides are hidden by the front side cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 which are separated from each other are viewed in a coordinated manner, so the rendering effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the rotating body group 722 b of the carriage 722 is formed to have the same diameter, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed large on one of the first slide members 720 and small on the other first slide member 720. In this case, the small diameter rotor group 722b can be sandwiched between the large diameter rotor group 722b and the first slide shaft rod S1. Thus, the effect of braking the rotating body group 722b can be improved by bringing the rotating body groups 722b into contact with each other.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in one place in the first slide member 2720 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the first slide member 2720 is stopped by forming the detection holes 2721c at a plurality of locations (for example, one end, the central portion, and the other end of the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720). A plurality of positions can be formed. At this time, by making the lengths in the longitudinal direction of the detection holes 2721 c different from each other, the positions of the first slide member 2720 can be detected at a plurality of places by the detection period of the detection device 2716.

  Although the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape is described in the second embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection holes 2721 c may be formed in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, the detection device 2716 is moved during movement of the first slide member 2720 by forming a plurality of detection holes 2721c continuously along the sliding direction of the first slide member 2720. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined by the time interval for blocking the transmitted light. In addition, by making the number of circular detection holes 2721 c formed different at each position in the longitudinal direction of the first slide member 2720 (for example, both ends and the central portion), the transmission of the detection device 2716 is performed while the first slide member 2720 is moving. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected by the number of times of light blocking.

  In the second embodiment, after the one slide member 2720 is stopped at the extended position, the position and the speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected by the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721 c. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when only the position or velocity of the other first slide member 2720 is detected, the relative velocity difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by reversely moving at least one of the first slide members 2720. And the impact at the time of contact can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740 are detected by one detection device 2716 has been described in the second embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a pair of detection devices 2716 may be disposed corresponding to the pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and velocity of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of the one second slide member 740.

  Although the case where the detection device 2716 is disposed on the base member 2710 has been described in the second embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection device 2716 may be disposed on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative velocity of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<About the first control process example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 96, a first control processing example in the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 is used as a trigger. Variable display is performed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, the variation display is performed commonly to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the third symbol. Also, the second special symbol is configured to be variably displayed in priority to the first special symbol, and is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not simultaneously variably displayed. It is done.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. The configuration may be possible. By configuring in this way, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols consisting of the numbers "0" to "9".

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display The jackpot is configured to occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows having main symbols are displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol column, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol column. The symbol row is displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

  In addition, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle and lower three stages for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the lower part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) of which the variation has not been executed, is the holding balls. One identification symbol (pending symbol) of "black circle" is displayed for one, and the player is informed. The player can determine the current number of balls held by the number of the held symbols.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the holding symbol, a character symbol, characters, etc. are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Be done. Moreover, when a game is not performed for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

  When the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is respectively The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the holding symbol is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 72) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a winning on the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) and a second winning opening 640 The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, according to the ball entering timing to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the second Each value of the random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the normal start openings (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is stored. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the random number table per one, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first hit random number table is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol, and high probability (special symbol special probability of being a big hit from low probability) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. Note that the first hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the first hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is any of "0 to 9" It is determined whether there is any, and if it is any of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit classification counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number to be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number which is dislocated, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the disapproval of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that will be the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "9" is as described above It is stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability time. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, there are 10 random number values that will be the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the special symbol has a high probability, and the value “0 to 9” is the first per random number for high probability It is stored in the table 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/30".

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". In addition, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "50 to 99" is "jackpot B". In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, you may be comprised so that a different big hit classification may be selected even if it is the value of the same 1st contact classification counter C2 with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the jackpot with the second special symbol is performed, by setting the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is executed is larger, the player with the hit with the second special symbol is made more to the player. It can be expected. Therefore, the hit in the high probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the convenience of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can strongly feel that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A so-called short time deviation, a long time deviation, and a rough display mode such as normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 72) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 55A) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. It is provided.

  For example, “off (for long time)”, “off (for short time)”, “off normal reach”, “off super reach”, and the like are defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202 b as the out fluctuation pattern. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and further detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the second embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passes either the left or right normal starting port (through gate) 67 When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 53 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. In addition, this second per random number table 202c is for high probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol), and high probability (normal symbol) with high probability of being hit of normal symbol from low probability. The number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  FIG. 53 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the second random number table 202c described above. In the second random number table 202c, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that will hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  When the ball passes the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened "one second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the release period of the second winning opening 640 Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 72), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 71). The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability variation effective flag 203p, a probability variation effective timer 203r, an ejection number counter 203s, a time counter 23t, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) as shown in FIG. 52, and in each of these areas The respective values of the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning of the first winning opening 64 are respectively stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for winning on the second winning opening 640 are stored respectively, The configuration of is the same, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. And. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right normal starting opening 67, and the acquired data is stored in four storage areas (storage area 1 to storage area 4) Among the vacant areas of the area (area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time Are added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 holding ball number command (S211 in FIG. 64, FIG. See S405). The special symbol 1 holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of pending balls on the display. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display controlled by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the holding ball of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command received.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d in that the number of holding balls held in the second winning opening 640 is stored and stored. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is changed, the special symbol 2 holding ball number command is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f has a maximum number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on passage of the ball at the normal starting opening 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 every time the ball passes the normal starting opening 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 68).

  When the ball passes either the left or right normal starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, when the ball passes either the left or right normal starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (( S703 of FIG. 69: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state (probability change gaming state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates that the low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S1213 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to be off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65 e 3, the probability variation setting flag 203 h is set to ON (S 1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (S1213 in FIG. 75). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). Also, in the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it has passed, the probability change setting flag It may be configured to formally turn on 203h and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0 or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round in the jackpot game (13 rounds with the jackpot A in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the gaming balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when passing the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1241 in FIG. 77). Further, after the process of determining whether the number of game balls having won the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is reset to the initial value "0" (S1271 in FIG. 78). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203 j is the number of gaming balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65 a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of gaming balls entering the first variable winning device 65). It is a counter for counting. Specifically, one is added and updated based on the fact that the game ball is detected as having passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings on the first variable winning device 65 (value of winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharging (total value of discharged number counter 203s and probability variation passing counter 203i) Are determined to match (S1267 in FIG. 78), and then reset to “0” which is an initial value. The value of the winning number counter 203 j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting a time during which the flow path solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the channel solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds at the jackpot A, and the channel solenoid 65k is turned ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13 rounds for jackpot B It is set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds for the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the big hit B (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, in the process of S1239 of the winning process (S1112, FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control unit 110, one is decremented and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0 (S1243 in FIG. 77: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is initialized to 0 when it is initialized. As described above, by setting the operation counter 203k to control the passage solenoid 65k, winning of the probability change switch 65e3 can be controlled by the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203 m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, an audio of “seeing liquid crystal”) for attracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, a notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (the first variable winning device 65 has 10 balls or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one by the process of S1224 in the notification process (S1111 in FIG. 76) of the main control apparatus 110. Based on the notification counter 203 m becoming 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, a voice of "seeing the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the thirteenth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), a girl's character is displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 The word "attention" is displayed, which is a notification prompting the player to look at the icon. In the 13th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the player pays attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to keep the expectation that the probability variation gaming state is given to the player until the end of the big hit game, a notification that makes the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51A) difficult for the player to see The production is being performed. However, when the 12th round is over, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during interval display, so it is informed that the third symbol display device 81 should be watched by voice during the interval period. Informing effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, the notification is made to show the third symbol display device 81 to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. By notifying the variable winning device 65 to hold the player's hand, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the notification of seeing the decoration lamp 34 etc. to the player may be configured to divert the player's attention. Furthermore, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read by a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the effect of diverting attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h is finished. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defect in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is performed by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203 n is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65 f 1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, a remaining ball timer 203o to be described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Is a counter to

  In the remaining ball timer 203o, when the preset one round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the gaming ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is discharged. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball to be discharged to the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the remaining ball timer 203o in advance. It is set as the upper limit value. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203o, it is determined whether the number of winning to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharging thereof match. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it can be early notified that the game ball is clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is left in the first variable winning device 65 illegally, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of 13 rounds, and the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, and the big hit B Even if it exists, it is possible to suppress the injustice causing the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  It should be noted that if the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change gaming state is provided illegally.

  When the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off, the probability variation effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is to be validated. When the probability variation effective flag 203p is set to ON, the gaming ball having flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51A) is a probability variation switch 65e3 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is on. It shows that it is less than the time required to go through. That is, the period in which the probability variation effective flag 203p is on indicates that the passage of the gaming ball through the probability variation switch 65e3 is a normal period.

  The probability variation effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation effective flag 203p described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine (measure) a period required to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 normally. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball having entered the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and after that, even if it passes the probability variation switch 65e3, it is determined to be incorrect and it is not determined to be passage.

  Thus, in a state where the switching member 65h does not lead to the special discharge port 65e2, the special discharge port 65e2 improperly enters the ball and passes the gaming ball to the probability changing switch 65e3 or plays the game with piano wire etc. from below the probability changing switch 65e3 It is possible to suppress the damage caused by the fraud, such as pushing up the ball and passing it, or causing the magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203 s is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65 e 4 (see FIG. 51A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls and the number of discharged balls are determined by the first variable winning device 65 (S1271 in FIG. 78).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. At this time, the counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. That is, in this embodiment, when it is not set to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game, it shifts to 100 time saving gaming states.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 70) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. There is.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types of fluctuation patterns (such as out-of-range, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) are respectively set to counter values for selecting fluctuation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The long-press effect lottery table 222 b is a frame button 22 when one of the variation patterns to be described later is selected as a SW variation pattern in which a display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22 is selected. It is a selection table for selecting the report mode which reports the operation timing etc. of. FIG. 55 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table 222b. In the long press effect lottery table 222b, the notification mode type of the operation method related to the long press operation of pressing the frame button 22 continuously for a predetermined period or more is set as the long press navigation type. Three types of long press navigation A, long press navigation B, and long press navigation C are set as long press navigation types.

  Here, each long press navigation type will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the long press navigation B. FIG. When the SW fluctuation pattern is selected and the long-press effect B is selected, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the characters “Let's get a big hit by long-press !!” are displayed, and the player holds the long-press By performing the above, a notification mode that causes a jackpot to be given is notified.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Please predict the long press start timing in the period meter !!" An indicator that changes in order to the direction is displayed. With this notification, the player predicts the correct long press start period and starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until all the colors of the indicator change. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, as shown in FIG. 61B, the timing for releasing the long press (the timing for releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the characters "Separate with count 0!" Are displayed, and an indicator whose color is variable sequentially from the left to the right is displayed below the character. The words “3 ········································ · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Navigation is to cancel. In this case, the countdown may be displayed in characters, and the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when the character of "release!" Is displayed.

  As described above, in the notification mode of the long press navigation B, the timing of the start of the long press is predicted by the player, and the timing of the long press release is clearly notified, thereby configuring the navigation of the medium difficulty. doing.

  When the timing of the start of the long press matches the start timing set in advance in the SW fluctuation pattern, notification that the player has made a big hit is executed if the success / failure determination result is a big hit. Thereby, the player can know early that the jackpot is successful.

  FIG. 62 (a) is a view showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of the long press navigation A, the player is expected that the character of "get big hit at the long press timing !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the jackpot is given at the timing of the long press. The notification mode to be displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), after the indicator is displayed and long pressed for an arbitrary period while the color of the indicator changes, the predetermined length for the player is set. The words "Ask for a long press period !!" prompting you to press a period will be displayed.

  As described above, the long press navigation A is a notification mode in which the player has to predict both the start timing of the long press and the release timing of the long press, and is configured in the navigation notification mode with the highest degree of difficulty. ing.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a view showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation C is selected. When the long press navi C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the characters "GET GET HIT AT SPECIFIED LONG PULL PERIOD !!" are displayed, and long press with the specified timing and period. A notification is provided to urge the player to perform. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the indicator is displayed, and the letters “start” and “end” are displayed below the indicator, and the long press is performed at the timing when the color of the indicator changes until the start. It is notified that it starts and cancels long press at the timing of "end".

  As described above, the long press navigation C is the navigation content with the lowest degree of difficulty in the long press navigation type, and is the notification mode to be selected only when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, which will be described later. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the long press effect lottery table 222b, the value (range 0 to 198) of the effect counter 223f to be described later is set for each long press navigation type according to the pass / fail determination result. There is. If the result of the determination is a hit, it is set so that the long press navigation type having a degree of difficulty lower than that of the case of being out is selected more easily. Thereby, it can be configured to change the sense of expectation to the jackpot by the long press navigation type to be displayed. In addition, it can be made to change whether or not the jackpot is awarded depending on the operation method of the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a game having a fresh taste.

  In the case where the long press operation is not executed even after a predetermined period of time, the long press effect may be terminated midway to switch to a change effect of a predetermined main symbol. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to enjoy the game even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag 223d A stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, an SW effective time storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b holds the holding balls of the first special symbol. It is supposed to manage the number.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball to first winning opening 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and is suspended. When the number of balls has been subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1408 in FIG. 25). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c stores the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b based on the holding ball number command output from the main control unit 110 And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 82). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time it is executed.

  The long press flag 223 g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed for 3 seconds or more and is long pressed. The time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by the long press counter 223h described later, and the long press flag 223g is set to ON when the count value is equal to or more than the count value indicating 3 seconds. .

  The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In this embodiment, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or longer, it is determined that an operation different from the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed in a normal short time is performed as long press (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) Is configured. Whether or not the long press is being performed can be determined by the long press counter 223h.

  The SW effective time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the above-mentioned SW variation pattern, it is determined that the frame button 22 set in the variation pattern is off. A period (time) set to OFF in which the button 22 is activated (S1807 in FIG. 83: No) is set in the SW effective time storage area 23i as the SW effective time. When the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i, the SW effective time is decremented by 1 based on the elapse of the SW effective time and updated (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control) and the advance notice. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later in detail.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 70) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control apparatus 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and entry of the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

  The power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. 81 is displayed (the third symbol display device 81 displays "o" and "x").

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is "the jackpot of the special symbol", and the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is "the out of special symbol".

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 so that the power-on-change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on change image resident in 235 b and the image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is directed against. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the entry to the first winning opening 64 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect is started, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a condition.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233 j and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. Since the longer the short term of this normal symbol, the more chances of the ball passing through the second entrance 67, the more chances of the regular symbol drawing will be made, and the chance of the normal symbol hitting will be many. Become. Therefore, the chance to enter the second winning opening 640 becomes easier because the chance to open the electric winning combination becomes a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy to be drawn lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric jackpot becomes a big hit of an ordinary symbol and the ball is a second winning opening It becomes easy to get to 640 and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 57) indicates the data table "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 58 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 15).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S2305 in FIG. 86 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 86B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 86 (b) (see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 94 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later (see FIG. 59) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 86 (b In step S2303), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 59), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, obtain the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time, and transfer data thereof Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 59, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 86 (b Every time the display setting process (see FIG. 91) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all stored sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by the initial setting process (see S 2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233j is performed when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 86B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 96).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 63 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning (start winning) on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) A holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the change display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B passed It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215) . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 It is determined whether the jackpot A, the small jackpot, or the jackpot A.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when becoming big hit A, blue LED is lighted in 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B. Also, in the case of a small hit, the red LED is lit, and in the case of a small hit, the red LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (current lottery result) It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the big hit type, set the open scenario of the specific winning opening (S217), then set the start of big hit A (such as 16 rounds The jackpot setting is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether the value of the time counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  When the probability change flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the big hit of the special symbol based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability time The first lottery result of whether or not is acquired from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random numbers set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)). As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random numbers may be used. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to that, it is determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random numbers may be set differently. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the hour and hour middle counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, the first acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the per-random number counter C1 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 53B), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. One of "9" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), A jackpot display mode indicating the jackpot A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type in the stop manner, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, a fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55A) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit (S307).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined detachment. Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out-of-pocket is determined based on the current number of holding balls (S309). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Although not shown, variation pattern commands for notifying the determined variation patterns to the audio lamp control device 113 are generated. When this process is over, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and determines whether or not the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 has a winning (start winning), and the start winning is performed. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as that of the processing of S401 to S406 is also performed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The process is different from the other in that the process of holding the second special symbol is executed with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), after the process of S412, the prefetch process is executed (S413). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the prefetching process (S413) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S413).

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 67, S413), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state at the start of the change is a definite change (S502), the gaming state If it is a definite change (S502: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the gaming state is not definite (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the motorized combination associated with the second winning opening 640 It is a process for controlling the opening time of a thing etc.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening / closing control of the motorized role piece 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. The middle part is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol (S 608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 609). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the second symbol random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. , And the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a is set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the process of S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S 618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display on the second symbol display device is ended when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 72) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (this time lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 68, S106) is the ordinary symbol It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is performed. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 has passed, and the passage of the ball was made In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 69, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 71, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. As described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 72, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 72), first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) and the start winning process (see FIG. 66) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect A jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but may be performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, a motorized product opening / closing process is performed to control the opening / closing of the motorized product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device 37A, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) ends. In the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation symbol being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B stop display (lighting display).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol change processing (refer to FIG. 68), the variation executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68). ).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 70 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winnings It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 64) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1103 that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). When it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario set (S1201). The opening operation of the flow passage solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Thereafter, this process ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow passage solenoid 65k for each round and the operation of the open / close door 65f1 are set.

  As described above, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Such problems can be suppressed.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the passage solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k (S1106). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1106: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1107). Thereafter, the flow passage solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when 15 rounds are finished and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) which is the ball discharging time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 75, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the audio lamp control device 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The probability change flag 203g is set to on (S1213). Although illustration is omitted, the probability change setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability change flag 203g being set to on. Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203 h is on. If the probability change setting flag 203 h is on, the probability change flag 203 g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the probability change. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the game ball is allowed to pass during the big hit game in the probability change switch 65e3, since the probability change gaming state is awarded after the big hit game, whether or not the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 also in the big hit game You can play games with interest.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, with reference to FIG. 76, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is a value larger than 0 (S1221). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is made in the 12th round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the twelfth round (S1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1222 that the end timing of the 12th round is not reached (S1222: No), this process ends. Here, the counter of 2 seconds is set in S1223, and the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the flash time after the 12 rounds are finished, and the sound of seeing the liquid crystal is It is output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player can draw attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. It is possible to suppress the jackpot type being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting the probability change gaming state to be provided until the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, effects are drawn to draw attention to the liquid crystal across the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and from the 12th round It may be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1221 that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after the update is 0 (S1225). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), a notification command is set (S1226). Thereafter, this process ends. In response to the notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 performs setting of the sound output of "seeing the liquid crystal".

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, a winning process is performed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1231). The round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1231: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a is passed (S1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1233). Thereafter, the process of S1234 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1232: No), the processing of S1234 is executed.

  In the process of S1234, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1236). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). Thereafter, the process of S1238 is performed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203 n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being blown after the open / close door 203 n is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether a round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the processing of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the processing of S1238 is executed.

  In the process of S1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1238). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by one and updated (S1239). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240). If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding one (S1241). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1242). Thereafter, the process of S1243 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1240 that the gaming ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the process of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1244). The probability variation effective flag 203p is set to on (S1245). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, when the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability change switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1238 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203p is on (S1246). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1246: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation valid timer 203r to update (S1247). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation effective timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1248). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1248: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to OFF (S1249). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1248 that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the process of S1240 is executed.

  Thereby, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of ball swelling. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being granted by causing the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the gaming ball illegally.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, this abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing is executed to monitor whether the probability changing switch 65e3 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1261). When it is out of the round effective period (S1261: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is within the round effective period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball exclusion counter 203s is incremented by one and updated (S1263). Thereafter, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the processing of S1264 is executed.

  In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 to the remaining ball timer 203o (S1265) because it is in the period of ball discharging time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1266: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is determined (S1266: Yes), the number of discharged items (total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the number of winning numbers (value of the number-of-winnings counter 203j) It is determined (S1267).

  If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the processing of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). Thereafter, the processing of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the injustice in which the gaming ball is made to remain illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and the probability changing switch 65e3 passes the gaming ball even if it is the big hit B.

  In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1270). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to initial values (S1271), and the process ends.

Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 According to First Embodiment
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 79, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current start-up process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1402). As described later with reference to FIG. 80, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 of FIG. 80), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1514. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1514 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1514 It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1516 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S1516. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in this case, the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 of FIG. 80). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1409), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410). The permission is set (S1411), and the process shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1408 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1404 through S1406 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410). Then (S1411), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that, when the process of S1408 is reached via the processes of S1404 to S1406, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1501 has been executed (S1501), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1512 without performing the process of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1502 to S1510, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of step S1512 or the command determination process of step S1511 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1511 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1504). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1505 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 has been confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring / rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed in time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1511). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variation display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control apparatus 110 It is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1601). If the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1603), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). And when the ball holding number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received ball holding number command is the special drawing 1 holding ball number command or the special drawing 2 holding ball number command. , The value contained in the command, ie, the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110 (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol), special symbol 2 of main controller 110 The value of the holding ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). Further, in the processing of S1608, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1608 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 holding ball number command or the special figure 2 holding ball number command, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or, the lottery of the special symbol line Since it is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when it is detected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608 every time a start winning is detected or every time a drawing of a special symbol is performed. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when detecting start winnings or drawing special symbols. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S1608 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1609). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in the present embodiment, "see the liquid crystal") is selected, and a display command for notification is set. (S1610).

  Next, in the process of S1609, when it is determined that the broadcast command is not received (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed. Then (S1619), the processing returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed control device 114 The command is set to be sent to the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1705). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1705: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process shifts to the processing of S1709. In the process of S1709, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1507) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1507). This frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1507) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and to enhance the effect in the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player, the display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect process (FIG. 83, S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect is started (S1801). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect is not started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the long press effect is started (S1801: Yes), the effect counter is acquired (S1802), and the long press is performed from the long press effect lottery table 222b (see FIG. A navigation pattern is selected (S1803). Next, the display command indicating the selected long press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1805.

  In the process of S1805, it is determined whether the SW effective time of the SW effective time storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S1805). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring and effect process (FIG. 83, S1507) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is larger than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1806), and it is determined whether the frame button is on (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW effective time is to subtract the elapsed time (in the present embodiment, the counter value is decremented by 1).

  If it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223 h (S 1808), and it is determined whether the long press flag 223 g is on ( S1809). If it is determined that the long press flag 223g is on (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring and effect processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the long press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810).

  If it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810: No), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810: Yes), the long press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), and a display command indicating long press is set (S1812), Return to main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) in the process of S1807 (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more S1813). If it is determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long press OFF is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (in this embodiment, the counter value is set to 0) (S1815), and then the long press flag 223g is set off (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<About Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in First Control Processing Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2303). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 84). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, next, the power on change image is generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. (S2005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 94A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 in FIG. 94A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), it is simplified so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. The command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86B) and the simplified display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 86B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device If it is via 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power variation image (not shown) is displayed immediately during the variation presentation period to perform a simple variation presentation Can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified and then the drawing of the image By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S 2301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2309) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 87, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S 2503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504) 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), a stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), and ends this type-of-stop command processing and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2408), If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), the back image change command processing is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89A, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2409) will be described. FIG. 89 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2701) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2702), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2701 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S2702. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2702 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2408 that there is no rear image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2410). For example (S2410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2802). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2802, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2802, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2410 that there is no rear surface image change command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command indicating a long press among the unprocessed commands (S2412). If there is a command indicating a press (S2412: Yes), a long press effect process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401. Here, the command indicating long press is a display command indicating a long press navigation pattern set in the process of S1804, a display command indicating long press in process set in the process of S1812, and This corresponds to the display command indicating long press-off set by the above.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the long press effect process (S2413) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing long press effect processing. In the long press effect processing, processing corresponding to a command indicating long press received from the voice lamp control device 114 is executed.

  In the long press effect processing (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether it is a long press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). If it is determined in the process of S2901 that the long press navigation effect is selected (S2901: Yes), display data corresponding to the long press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  On the other hand, when the long press navigation effect is not determined (S2901: No), it is determined whether it is a long press command (see S1812 in FIG. 83) (S2903). If it is determined in the process of S2903 that the command is a long press (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of the long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the command is not determined to be a long press command (S2903: No), display data corresponding to long press off is set (S2905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

  In the process of S2401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), The processes of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area The command determination process ends.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 88 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 88 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and it is the timing to perform the finalized display. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S3009 (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3017), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3018). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3021), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 86B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simplified display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect due to the power-on time fluctuation image ends A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 94 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S3302) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 94 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the process of S3401, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 86B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3513). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 86B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the content of the SW fluctuation pattern is changed with respect to the first control example. In the first control example described above, the effect of long-pressing the frame button 22 has been described as being performed in the SW variation pattern, but in the second control example, an effect of capturing fish at the timing of pressing the frame button 22 Is different in that The other configurations are the same, and thus the other configurations are omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has the long press effect lottery table 222b deleted and the capture effect lottery table 222c added to the first control example. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The capture effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which moving directions and the like of the fish and the net displayed in the SW fluctuation pattern in the second control example are set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of the display mode displayed by the SW fluctuation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the SW fluctuation pattern in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), a fish and a net are displayed, and further, the characters "Push the button according to the fish !!" are displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 at a position where the fish enters the net of the net, a display mode is displayed so that the player can obtain the fish. Furthermore, on the right side of the display area, an indicator composed of a plurality of graduations is displayed, and the color is variable (for example, from blue to red) one cell at a high speed (for example, one speed for 0.5s). Variable) is displayed. There are six graduations, and the letters "GET" are displayed at the third and sixth divisions from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state in which the color of the scale is changed, it is configured such that the display timing in which the fish is in the net is exactly reached.

  On the other hand, the fish and net are controlled to be moved and displayed in the moving direction set in the SW effect type selected in the capture effect lottery table 222c. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but at the timing when the position of the indicator "GET" of the indicator is changed, display control is performed so that the fish is positioned in the net.

  As a result, the player can easily understand the timing of pressing the frame button 22 more easily by relying not only on the positional relationship between the fish and the net but also on the timing at which the indicator changes, and participates in the production of the SW fluctuation pattern. Make it easy to play games. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the fish is displayed on the position of the net by the indicator. In the present embodiment, the indicator is always displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The indicator may be displayed when the expectation of the jackpot is high, and may not be displayed when the expectation is low. By configuring in this way, by displaying the indicator, the expectation to the jackpot can be increased, and furthermore, the jackpot can be rendered in a state where the fish can be captured by the player.

  FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the capture effect lottery table 222c, the values of the effect counter 223f are allocated and set for capture effects A to C when the success or failure determination result is a hit, and for capture effects D to F when the result is off. It is done. The capture effects A to C are configured to be able to press the frame button 22 at timing when the fish is in the net, and are set as effects capable of capturing fish. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the timing (period) in which the fish is in the net is shorter than the period necessary for detecting that the frame button 22 is pressed by pressing the frame button 22. It is set to be impossible to capture.

  Although the illustration is omitted in the present embodiment, if the result of the determination of the success or failure is out, even if the frame button 22 is pressed by chance when the net and the fish coincide with each other, the display is displayed shifted. In other words, it was configured not to display the effect that the fish was able to capture. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at the timing when the fish and the net coincide with each other, the effective period of the frame button 22 is controlled to be excluded instantaneously (for example, the coincident display period of 0.2 s). It is possible to reduce the load of performing control to shift and display.

  In the capture effect A and the capture effect D, display modes are set in which the fish and the net move at high speed to random positions in the lateral direction and are displayed. The capture effect B and the capture effect E are display modes in which the fish and the net move to random positions and are displayed. The capture effects C and F are display modes in which the fish and the net move to random positions in the oblique direction and are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the result of judgment of acceptance is a hit, it is set easier to be selected than in the case where the capture effect A and the capture effect B are out. Therefore, the player can predict the result of the judgment of acceptance based on the movement direction of the fish and the net (ie, the type of capture effect). Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the effect of the SW fluctuation pattern to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the capture effect is selected by lottery based on the selection of the SW variation pattern, but the selected SW variation pattern may be set in advance. . In this control example, the movement direction of the fish and the net is set according to the type of capture effect, but the movement direction is not set in advance, and the display position is updated each time the display position of the fish and the net is updated. May be determined by lottery and updated. In this case, when the display is updated from the display position of the currently displayed fish and net, the moving direction and the moving distance may be determined by lottery and displayed. By configuring in this way, the positions of the fish and the net can be made more random, and it is possible to perform a presentation with a fresh taste for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97 (b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different in that the long press flag 223g and the long press counter 223h are respectively deleted from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 54B) of the first control example. The other configuration is the same, so the detailed description will be omitted.

Regarding Control Process in Second Control Example
The control processing in the second control example is different from the first control example in the contents of the control processing in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The present second control example is different from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 83, S1507) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 99, S1520) Do. The other configurations are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the capture effect which is the SW fluctuation pattern is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is a SW variation pattern (a variation pattern of capture effect). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S1822). The type of capture effect is selected based on the effect counter 223f that has acquired the content of the capture effect from the capture effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 97 (c)) and the result of the pass / fail determination corresponding to the selected SW fluctuation pattern ( S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). The display command corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 by outputting the display command to the display control device 113. The SW effective time set in the SW fluctuation pattern is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i (S1825). Thereafter, the process of S1826 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1821 that the fluctuation pattern of the capture effect is not selected (S1821: No), the process of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW effective time storage area 223i is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time is set (S1826). If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S 1826: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S 1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed) (S 1828). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating that the SW is pressed is set (S1829). Reset the SW effective time to 0, which is the initial value. As a result, since the SW effective time is reset along with the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to suppress that the plural effects are changed and the player is confused. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 in the process of S1828 (S1626: No) or it is determined that the frame button 22 is off in the process of S1828 (S1828: No), this process Finish.

  In the present control example, in the capture effect, the frame button 22 can be pressed once, but the invention is not limited thereto, and may be set a plurality of times.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Control Example
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, for the first control example, the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) is a command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320), and the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) is a display setting process. It is different in that it is changed to 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) in the second control example is the same as the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the first control example except that the processes of S2412 to S2413 are deleted and the processes of S2414 to S2415 are performed. Is different in that each has been added. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S2410 that an error command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether a command indicating that it is related to a SW effect has been received (S2414). The command related to the SW effect corresponds to a display command (see S1824 in FIG. 99) indicating the selected capture effect or a display command indicating SW depression indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed.

  If it is determined that the command related to the SW effect is received in the process of S2414 (S2414: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (S2415). The SW effect processing (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect process (S2415). In the SW effect process, a process of executing setting of corresponding display data is performed based on a command of SW effect (capture effect) received from the audio lamp control device 113 or a command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. .

  In the SW effect process (FIG. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether it is a command indicating any of capture effects A to F that are SW effects (S2911). If it is a command indicating any of capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2911 that the command does not indicate any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913). If it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the stop of the content of the displayed capture effect is set (S2914). Thereafter, this process ends.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed, it is fixed at the position where the net of the capture effect and the position of the fish are displayed, and the fixed period (in the present control example, the SW effective time set first passes) Continue to be displayed until the same period as the previous period has elapsed. Thereafter, when the fish can be stopped at a position where the fish is in the net, a display mode (for example, the characters “Get !!”) indicating that the fish can be captured is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish is stopped at a position other than the position where the fish is in the net, a display mode (for example, the characters “capture failure !!”) indicating that the fish could not be captured is displayed.

  Next, display setting processing 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the display setting process 2 (S2330). In display setting processing 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example, SW effect display setting processing (FIG. 103, S3030) is added to the display setting processing (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. They differ in that they The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. After the process of S3005 is executed, a SW effect display setting process is executed (S3030). The details of the SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether or not the capture effect is being displayed is a period during which the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW effective time, and the indicator before the frame button 22 is pressed is variably displayed at high speed. It indicates whether it is a period.

  If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), the indicator determines whether the color of the scale corresponding to "Get" is displayed being changed (S3032). When the scale of the indicator is variably displayed on the indicator (S3032: Yes), display data in which the display positions of the fish data and the net data coincide with each other is set (S3033). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set in accordance with the display coordinates at which the fish data are displayed. By this configuration, the display positions of the fish and the net can be made to coincide with each other at the timing when the scale of the indicator is changed. In this control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period in which the indicator is displayed in Get is set to be longer than the period necessary for pressing the frame button 22, and the frame button is performed in a timely manner. If 22 is pressed, it is set so that it can catch a fish. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the period in which the indicator is displayed in Get is set to be shorter than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the capture can be performed at any timing when the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured to be impossible.

  In the present embodiment, the capture enable state and the capture impossible state are set by changing the time during which the indicator is changed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. In capture effects D to F, the frame button 22 is captured at the capture timing. When the key is pressed, the positions of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so that the fish can not be captured.

  Further, in this control example, the success of capture is configured to notify the jackpot of the result of determination of the success or failure, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the success of capture provides the player with points to be used in the game as a game bonus Alternatively, a URL for downloading a standby image used by a mobile phone, a three-dimensional code, or a special background image may be set. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to execute an effect that the capture is successfully performed even when the result of the pass / fail judgment is out. Thus, the player can be more entertained by the SW effect.

  In the process of S3032, when a scale other than the position corresponding to Get is variably displayed on the indicator (S3032: No), it is determined whether it is the timing at which the next scale of the indicator is variably displayed. (S3034). When it is determined that the indicator is the timing when the next scale is variably displayed (S 3034: Yes), the coordinate data for displaying the fish and the coordinate data for displaying the net are respectively selected. Each is moved and set in the movement direction set in the capture effect (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is acquired and the number of movement coordinates is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S 3036: Yes), the same process as S 3035 is executed again (S 3037). Thereby, when the indicator is not the scale of Get, it is possible to suppress the problem that the display positions of the fish and the net coincide with each other and the fish are displayed in the net. On the other hand, in the process of S3034, when the scale of the indicator does not change (S3034: No), or when it is determined that the position data do not match in the process of S3036 (S3036: No), this process ends. .

  As described above, although the movement direction set in the capture effect is determined, the display positions of the fish and the net are randomly set by lottery, so the display of the fish and the net can be irregular. . On the other hand, the variable of the indicator is previously set in the display data table corresponding to the SW fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be regularly changed and displayed.

  In this control example, the display positions of the fish and the net are determined by drawing for each update of the display position, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and is configured to be preset in the display data table like the indicator. You may

  Further, in the present control example, the moving direction of the fish is defined by the selected type of capture effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the positions of the fish and the net may be randomly set by lottery. Good.

<Third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. In the first control example, regardless of the gaming state (probability changing gaming state, time saving gaming state, etc.), the timing at which the special symbol starts changing when the holding ball is not stored is configured to be constant. However, the second control example is different in that the processing is executed so that the timing of the start of fluctuation is different depending on the gaming state. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
The electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. The present third control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 113 are changed. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 104 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, a weight counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53C) in the first control example. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The weight counter 203u counts the delay time for delaying the change start timing of the second special symbol when there are no holding balls when time is short (in the case of the probability variation gaming state or the time shortening gaming state). It is a counter.

  When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is zero when the time counter is short, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314 in FIG. 106). reference). Further, when the counter value is set to the weight counter 203u, it is decremented and updated by one each time the time saving processing (S231 in FIG. 106) is executed.

  As described above, when it is determined that the number of holding balls for the second special symbol is zero during the short time, and the variation of the special symbol is not executed, then, the game ball enters the second winning opening 640. Even if it does, the fluctuation start is delayed for 1 second. Here, the second winning opening 640 is accompanied by the electric role product 640a, and when the electric role object 640a is in the open state, the game ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. In this case, two or more game balls can be easily won in one open state. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter at one opening with a holding ball of zero, once the variation start of the second special symbol is set immediately at the timing when the first game ball enters the ball. The holding balls of the second special symbol are determined as zero, and it becomes easy to select a relatively long fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time. As a result, in spite of the time saving, the efficiency of the game becomes worse, which makes the player uncomfortable.

  However, in the characteristic configuration of this control example, since the timing of the start of fluctuation is delayed by one second by the weight counter 203u, when the motorized role object 640a is in the open state during that time, the plurality of gaming balls are continuous. When entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a defect that the holding ball of the second special symbol is determined as zero and the first variation is started.

  In this control example, when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the state of fluctuating stop during the short time, the delay time of 1 second is set, but it is not limited thereto. It may be configured to set a delay time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than 3 seconds, which is a variation time of a normal symbol during time saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay the start of variation of the second special symbol until the timing when the motorized role 640a is released, and to delay the timing when the gaming ball wins the second winning opening 640. . Further, the delay time may be set in accordance with the timing at which the opening of the motorized accessory 640a is set. In this case, even with a short delay time, it can be effectively suppressed that the number of holding balls is zero and that a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. In addition, it is not limited to the time saving, it is not limited to the second winning opening 640.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, when there are 0 to 2 pending balls, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is easily selected and set. There is. Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time to delay until a period in which the number of holding balls is three or more.

  In addition, in this control example, in time saving game state, it was constituted to delay the fluctuation start of the 2nd special symbol, but it is possible not to be limited to that, to be the probability change game state, to decide the timing which is delayed by lottery It may be configured to be delayed when the number of holding balls is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, one). Furthermore, you may comprise so that it may be delayed by a 1st special symbol not only in a 2nd special symbol. In addition, by delaying the change start timing of the second special symbol at the end timing of the big hit game, it is determined that there is no number of holding balls in the second special symbol, and it is configured to suppress the problem of starting the change. It is also good.

  In this control example, although it was constituted so as to delay the timing of the start of fluctuation, it is not limited thereto, but the determination time of the special symbol during fluctuation (period from when the fluctuation time passes until it is judged as fluctuation stop, That is, when the symbol is fixedly stopped and the period from when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped in the process of S 202 of FIG. 64 is variably set, and the holding ball of the second special symbol is not stored. The period may be set to be long.

  In addition, in this control example, it was configured to delay when the time is short, but at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, a period until setting the start of fluctuation every time (determine the holding ball and set the start of fluctuation It may be configured to set a long period). In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the electric role 640a is in the open state, it may be configured to delay the timing of setting the start of the variation of the second special symbol.

Regarding Control Processing in Third Control Example
Next, control processing in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 106. FIG. The present third control example is different from the first control example in that the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111). The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third control example. The special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 105, S111) in the third control example is the processing of S231 to S233 added to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in motion (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is short (S231). It is determined that being in time saving is in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state. When it is determined that the time is short (S231: Yes), the time variation processing is executed (S232).

  Here, the time saving processing (S232) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time variation processing (S232) at this time. In the time saving processing (FIG. 106, S232), first, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S311). When the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0, it is a case where delay time has already been set to the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the weight counter 203u is set by subtracting -1 (S312). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S311, when it is determined that the weight counter 203u is 0 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e which is the holding ball number of the second special symbol is 0 It is determined (S313). If it is determined that the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol is zero (S313: Yes), a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S313 that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this process is ended.

  Here, returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. After the processing of the time saving processing (S232 in FIG. 106) is performed, the processing of S233 is performed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S233). If the weight value is set in the weight counter 203u, this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the processing of S203 is executed.

  Thus, since the start of variation of the special symbol is not set until the weight counter 203u is executed, it is suppressed that the variation of the second special symbol is determined to be from 0 to 2 during the time saving and executed. it can. In this control example, the value set in the weight counter 203u is 1 second, but it is not limited to this, and it is a time longer than the fluctuation time (3 seconds in this control example) of the normal symbol during time saving 5 It may be configured to set seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to control so that the variation start of the second special symbol is set after the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is more than three more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the gaming efficiency during time saving is deteriorated as it is determined that there is a small number of holding balls (0 to 2) and a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected.

Fourth control example
Next, with reference to FIG. 107 to FIG. 109, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. In the fourth control example, with respect to the first control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped a plurality of times during a variation period of one special symbol (swing variation is stopped) and the variation of the special symbol is made a plurality of times. As it is, it is different in that the effect to be shown in a pseudo manner is set. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. The pseudo continuous effect is a temporary symbol of one or more times in the variation of the special symbol of 1, and displays the variation display again, as if the variation of 1 is a plurality of variations. It is an effect to show the player.

  FIG. 107A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is started, it is a low speed fluctuation that is the fluctuation (dynamic display) of the speed that enables identification of the symbol from the start of the fluctuation. It becomes a high-speed fluctuation which is a fluctuation (dynamic display) of the speed, and as shown in FIG. FIG. 107 (b) is an example of a display mode in the case of temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous effect, and the third symbol is slightly swung up and down and varied, and the character is displayed on the front side A static symbol is displayed overlapping each third symbol. This static symbol is set smaller than the size of each third symbol, and a part of the third symbol on the back side is configured to be visible. In addition, the stationary symbol is attached and displayed at the timing of the fluctuation display immediately before the temporary stop from the state of the high-speed change before the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, in the case of high-speed display, the third pattern is displayed semi-transparently, and the background image can be seen through for visual recognition. Then, the semi-transparent display is canceled immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically, 0.5 seconds before, and the display is made in an opaque state. A static symbol is attached and displayed at the display timing. In addition, since this stationary symbol is not displayed as it shakes and fluctuates like the third symbol and is displayed still, the player is not temporarily stopping, but whether the third symbol is fixed or not You can feel like that.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect is a fixed stop, and it is possible to make it appear that the variable display is performed a plurality of times.

  In this control example, the static symbol is the same symbol as each third symbol, but may be a different symbol or shape. Also, the brightness of the third symbol displayed on the back may be displayed lower than the brightness of the static symbol. By displaying in this manner, the still symbol can be made more noticeable, and the player can be made to think as if the game has stopped.

  In this control example, the static symbol is only displayed with the character, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the identification number of the third symbol displayed on the back side (for example, 7 for 7 symbols) is attached. May be configured to be displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the still symbol illusion as if it were the third symbol, and it is possible to make it look as if the player has stopped making a decision.

<Control Process in Fourth Control Example>
Next, control processing in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 109. FIG. In the fourth control example, the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) with respect to the first control example. It differs in the point. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of display setting processing 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fourth control example. In display setting processing 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, symbol temporary stop setting processing (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting processing (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. They differ in that they About the other structure, since the same processing as the first control example is executed, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 109, symbol temporary stop setting processing (S3040) which is one processing in display setting processing 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), a process of temporarily stopping and displaying a symbol is executed when the pseudo continuous effect is set. In the pseudo continuous effect, the timing at which the symbol is temporarily stopped is set in advance as a variation pattern, and is automatically set by defining a display data table.

  In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is being performed. If it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern of pseudo continuous effect (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of temporary stop of the third symbol (S3042). When it is determined that it is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of symbol temporary stop (S3043: Yes), still image data is set at the symbol position where temporary stop is to be made (S3043). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, the still image data is set so as to overlap the symbol information of the display data table. As described above, by executing the still image data to be displayed overlappingly at the temporary stop display timing of the third symbol, the type or the like of the still image data can be changed by the operation of the frame button 22 of the player, It can be set variably according to the notice display etc., and can be made into a wide variety of still images.

  In this control example, in the pseudo continuous effect, the third symbol is temporarily stopped by the number of times set in advance in the variation pattern, and thereafter, the third symbol always becomes the reach display mode, and the display mode of the super reach is displayed Be done. In the first temporary stop, the still image is displayed in the first temporary stop so that the player can distinguish the number of times the temporary stop has been made. The display is set to yellow for the third time, red for the third time, and gold for the fourth time. In fact, when the still image is displayed without shaking and fluctuation, it is easy for the player to be recognized as the number of times the variable display is actually performed instead of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player is expected to display the variable reach to become the super reach by the subsequent variable display of the special symbol when the stationary symbol notifying the continuous number of times is displayed by the change of the plurality of special symbols. Can. In this control example, as the number of times of temporary stopping increases, the expectation of the jackpot is set to be high (it is easy to be selected in the case of the judgment result of the success or failure), and four temporary stops are executed. It consists only of the pseudo-continuous effect where the result of the judgment is a big hit. Therefore, when the red stationary symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect the still image to be displayed even with the next change, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the still image is set to non-display at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after being temporarily stopped. Thereby, it is possible to set the player to easily see the change of the third symbol.

  The still image is not limited to the character of this control example, but may be a character, or may be displayed with a size that hides the fluctuation of the third symbol on the back. In addition, in fact, since it is a temporary stop, you may comprise the still image so that visual recognition of the 3rd design of the back is possible so that it may be slightly understood that the 3rd design of the back is swayed and fluctuated .

<Fifth control example>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 151. In each of the control examples described above, it is determined whether or not the probability variation gaming state is provided by the operation of the flow channel solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k in the first variable winning device 65 where game balls can enter during a big hit game It was configured to be. On the other hand, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is provided by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V prize device 900 capable of entering game balls during a small hit game It differs in that it is configured as follows. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and the same portions are denoted with the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, instead of the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65 is provided at the lower center of each control example described above, and the V winning device 900 is right instead of the first variable winning device 65. It is provided in the lower part, the 2nd winning a prize mouth 640 is provided in the upper part of V prize winning device 900, the point which differs in the point where the electromotive role item 640a is provided on the right side of the 2nd winning a prize mouth 640. The other parts of the configuration are the same as in the first control example, so the same parts are denoted with the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Although details will be described later, the first variable winning device 65 has the same structure as the second winning opening in each control example described above. Further, the V winning device 900 is different in that the retaining member 900 n is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the control examples described above, and the other points are the same structure.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the difference between the game boards 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right portion of the game board 13.

  In the lower right portion of the game board 13 in the present control example, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is provided, and the gaming ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 enters the ball by natural fall. The second winning opening 640 is provided at a position where it does not occur (the lower left position). In addition, nails are provided from the left part to the upper right part of the second winning opening 640, and those nails have a predetermined interval (interval where the game ball can not pass through) to the above-mentioned normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 Provided in Furthermore, a motorized accessory 640a is provided at a position where the gaming ball having passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (or the right side thereof) can be guided to enter the second winning opening 640.

  Here, the motorized role product 640a operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209z). The motorized role product 640 a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by moving forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing operation), the game ball is not guided to the second winning opening 640 (not entered).

  That is, the second winning opening 640 is configured such that the game ball will not enter unless the electric role product 640a is released. Also, even if the motorized role product 640a performs an opening operation, if the time (opening time) of the opening operation is short, the opening operation is ended while the gaming ball is being induced, so 2 will not enter the winning opening 640.

  In the present embodiment, by providing a nail from the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 to the second winning opening 640, the gaming ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening Although it is configured not to enter the ball 640, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same configuration may be adopted by covering with a case body. In this way, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of changing the interval between the nails so that the game ball can pass. Further, the case body, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and the second winning port 640 may be integrated, or only part of them may be integrated.

  In addition, a shielding member interlocking with the motorized product 640a is provided, and when the motorized product 640a is in the closed state (retracted state), the second winning opening 640 is closed, and when the motorized product 640a is in the opened state (advanced state). The second winning opening may be opened. Thus, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 640 regardless of the closed position of the electric role product 640a.

  Furthermore, the game ball which has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is configured to be changed whether or not to enter the second winning opening 640 based on the operation of the motorized accessory 640a, Not limited to this, the gaming ball that has passed through the predetermined area (for example, the gaming ball that has passed through the passage opening, the gaming ball that has just been fired, etc.) is sent to the second winning opening 640 based on the operation of the electric character 640a. It may be configured to change whether or not to enter the ball.

  A V winning device 900 is provided under the above-described second winning opening 640, the electric role object 640a, and the like. The V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning opening 900a, and the game ball enters the V winning opening 900a, whereby a predetermined gaming ball (for example, three balls) is paid out to the player. Be In addition, a jackpot game will be awarded when the gaming ball having entered the V winning opening 900a passes a V winning switch 900e3 described later.

  In the upper part of the V winning opening 900a, an open / close door 900f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side as in the first control example described above is provided, and the open / close door 900f1 is opened. The game ball can enter the V winning hole 900a, and the open / close door 900f1 is closed, so that the game ball can not enter the V hole 900a. The details of the V prize device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. The open / close door 900f1 is opened and closed by a V inlet solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209z).

  In addition, the structure which suppresses the force of the game ball which rolls on the upper surface of the opening-closing door 900f1 and the game ball rolling surface of V winning device 900 upper part is provided (not shown). Specifically, the rolling speed is reduced using a material having a high coefficient of friction (eg, rubber, a material having irregularities), the rolling speed is reduced using a structure in which the rolling game balls collide, or the game is played There is a structure in which balls are induced in the board depth direction to increase the rolling distance. This is a configuration for putting many gaming balls together and entering the V prize winning device when the open / close door 900f1 is opened.

  A first winning opening 64 is provided on the left side of the V winning device 900 and at the lower center of the gaming board, and a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning opening 64. The first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times in the case of the big hit C) in the big hit game, and the predetermined variable winning device 65a is obtained by entering game balls into the first variable winning device 65a. A game ball (for example, 15 balls) is paid out. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the second winning opening 640 described above in the first control example is treated as the first variable winning device 65, the code is changed from 640 to 65 for the same part. And will not be described in detail.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow channel of the back cover body 900e in the V winning device 900 are distributed to a normal discharge flow channel 900e1 and a special discharge flow channel 900e2 described later. Do. The V winning device 900 in this control example is a V switch 900 e 3 instead of the positive change switch 65 e 3 in that the retaining member 900 n is provided on the special discharge flow path 65 e 2 of the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example. Are different in that they are provided, and otherwise identical. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example is treated as the V winning device 900, the code is changed from 65 to 900 for the same part. And will not be described in detail.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow passage 900e2.

  As described above, when the switching member 900h is activated, the gaming balls having passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900 are distributed to the special discharge flow passage 900e2. In this control example, a retention member 900n is provided in the special discharge flow passage 900e2. Only one ball can be held in the distribution destination area 900h3, which is the area to which the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow passage 900e2 side by the switching member 900h, by the holding member 900n. As a result, when one game ball is staying in the distribution destination area 900h3, the game ball having passed the detection port 900a1 of the V prize winning apparatus 900 is usually discharged without being distributed to the special discharge flow passage 900e2. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

  The retention member 900 n is configured of a shutter mechanism that can be inserted and retracted from the game board 13 side. The retaining member 900 n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a retaining solenoid 209 a (not shown). The staying member 900 n can hold one game ball in the distribution destination area 900 h 3 by advancing operation (closing operation) forward. On the other hand, by retreating backward (opening operation), the gaming balls staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  Here, the V winning device 900 allows the game ball to enter the game by opening the open / close door 900f1 during the small hitting game. In addition, staying member 900n becomes closing operation during small hitting game (when it is possible to enter V prize device 900), after the small hitting game ends (the new entering ball to V prize device 900 is not good After the predetermined time has elapsed (after 3 seconds in this control example), the release operation is performed. That is, in this control example, even if the switching member 900h is in operation, the gaming ball flowing into the special discharge flow passage 900e2 is limited to one ball even if the gaming ball entered into the V prize device 900. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the gaming balls flowing down to the special discharge flow passage 900e2 become excessive.

  The gaming ball having flowed down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 passes through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, the probability change game is provided based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3, but in the present control example, the jackpot game is provided based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 ( S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138 described later and S4904 in FIG. 142 described later).

  In this control example, the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow passage 900e2 are limited to one ball, but the invention is not limited thereto, and two or more game balls can be retained in the distribution destination area 900h3 Alternatively, the number of gaming balls to be restricted may be appropriately changed by operating the staying member a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the small hitting game.

  Referring to FIG. 113 (b), the case where the gaming ball is guided to the normal discharge flow channel 900e2 will be described. FIG. 113 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 900k is not operating and the opening piece of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2 is blocked by the induction piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h.

  In this control example, even when the flow passage solenoid 900k is inoperative, the retention member 900n provided in the special discharge flow passage 900e2 operates. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the process according to the presence or absence of the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k, so it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

  When the flow path solenoid 900k is inoperative, all gaming balls having passed the detection port 900a1 of the V prize winning apparatus 900 flow downward to the normal discharge flow path 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no gaming ball flowing down to the special discharge flow passage 900 e 2, there is no influence by the staying member 900 n newly provided in this control example, and the operation is the same as the first control example described above. Omit.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. FIG. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first control example in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control unit 110 and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control unit 113 And a part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 is changed (added) and a staying solenoid 209a is added as the solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. And otherwise identical. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 114, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

  The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a staying solenoid 209 a is provided as the solenoid 209. As described above, the staying solenoid 209a is used to operate the staying member 900n in the V prize device 900. In addition, the solenoids (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k and the like) described in each of the control examples described above are handled as part of the other solenoids 209z.

  As another change point, ROM 202 and RAM 203 in main controller 110, a part of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in audio lamp control device 113, and a part of ROM 234 (effect) in display control device 114 are changed (added) And will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115 to 127. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, each counter in this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The present control example is different in that a small hitting type counter C5 is added in addition to the counters in the first control example described above.

  The small hitting type counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present control example) and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). The small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Then, the small hitting type is selected based on the value of the small hitting type counter C5. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The other counters are the same as those in the first control example described above, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110, and FIG. 116 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control unit 110. .

  In addition to the ROM 202 in the first control example, the ROM 202 in the present control example has at least a small hitting type selection table 202 e (see FIG. 116A). This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when the small hit occurs based on the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the RAM 203 in the present control example has a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit middle flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit middle flag 203w2, a V passing jackpot type value 203x1, a V flag It has at least 203x2, a normal symbol time short first time flag 203y. In the present control example, the positive change flag 203e is not shown because it is unnecessary.

  The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot start timing. This jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and it is referred to determine whether it is a jackpot start timing in jackpot control processing 2 (See S4701 in FIG. 140), and is determined to be off when it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 that it is the jackpot start timing (see S4702 in FIG. 140). Thereby, processing according to the jackpot start timing can be executed. Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted also in each control example mentioned above, the big hit start timing is similarly discriminate | determined.

  The jackpot flag 203 v 2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot flag 203v2 is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing, as in the jackpot start flag 203h described above (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, reference is made to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S4704 in FIG. 140), and when it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 that it is the timing of the jackpot end. It is set to off (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

  The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used to determine whether it is a small hit start timing. The small hitting start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process, which is executed when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to determine whether it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control processing (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and it is determined that the start timing of the small hit is in the small hit control processing. (See S4802 in FIG. 141).

  The small hit middle flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether a small hit is in progress, that is, whether a small hit game is being executed. The small hit middle flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, as in the small hit start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the small hitting is in the small hitting control process (S4807 in FIG. 141), and it is turned off when it is judged in the small hitting control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. It is set (S 4812 in FIG. 141).

  The V-pass jackpot type value 203x1 is used to set a jackpot type to be awarded when the game ball passes the V prize switch 900e3 of the V prize device 900. The V-pass jackpot type value 203x1 is set in accordance with the small hitting type in the small hitting start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). Then, the set V-pass jackpot type value 203x1 is acquired in the V-passing process (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138). The V-pass jackpot type value 203x1 is cleared in the small hitting end process executed at the end of the small hitting game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

  The V flag 203x2 is a flag for storing that the gaming ball has passed through the V prize switch 900e3 of the V prize device 900, and determines the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203x2 when the small hitting ends. is there. The V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the V passing jackpot type value 203x1 in the V passing process (S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138), and is referred to in the small hitting end process (S4902 and S4904 in FIG. 142) After being referred to, it is set to off (S4906 in FIG. 142).

  The normal symbol time short first time flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the variation of the normal symbol in the short time game is the first time. The normal symbol time short first time flag 203y is set to ON when the jackpot type is C at the timing of the jackpot end in the jackpot control processing 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is referred to in the normal symbol variation processing. (See S642 in FIG. 136). The details will be described later, but it is referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and when it is determined that the normal symbol time short first flag 203y is on (S641 in FIG. 136: Yes), the motorized role object 640a is for a long time (5 seconds) It is set so as to be opened and allow many game balls to enter the second winning opening 640 (S642 in FIG. 136), and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol time short first time flag 203y is off (S641 in FIG. 136: No), a small amount of game is made to the second winning opening in which the electric role is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). The ball is set to be able to enter the ball (S 644 in FIG. 136).

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 117 (d) schematically shows the contents of the second random number table 202c. It is a schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the first hit random number table 202a indicates whether the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the first winning opening 64 is a big hit or not In order to determine whether the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining The special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is provided.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202 a 1 is determined to be a random number (a winning symbol in the first special symbol lottery based on entering the first winning opening 64) It is a table in which a judgment value is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that a big hit is made. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 399", it is determined that the value is out.

  On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), a random value (decision value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that a big hit is made. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 398”, and if it is “1 to 398”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that "399", it is determined that it is out.

  As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol based on entering the first winning opening 64, there is one random number that will be a big win for the first special symbol, and the total number of random numbers is 400. Among the existing, since the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 1, the probability of becoming a jackpot of the first special symbol is "1/400". In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be small per unit is 3, the probability to be a small per unit of the first special symbol is "3/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on entering the second winning opening 640, the random number that will be the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, and while the total number of random numbers is 400, the jackpot and Since the total number of random number values is 11, the probability of becoming a jackpot of the second special symbol is “1/400”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers to be small hits is 398, the probability to be small hits for the second special symbol is "398/400".

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 204, the symbol hits normally and It is determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

  In the same manner as in the above-described control examples, when it is determined that a normal symbol is hit, the symbol of "o" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished. At the same time, the motorized control product 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 112 and the like, the motorized role 640 a in the present control example operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209 z). The motorized role product 640 a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by moving forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing operation), the game ball is not guided to the second winning opening 640 (not entered).

  Although the details will be described later, the motorized accessory 640a in the present control example is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is short, but is only opened for 0.2 seconds when the time is not short. In addition, the open time 0.2 seconds of the motorized role product 640 a is shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to be guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even when the time is not short, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a hit, the game ball can not be won to the second winning opening. In this way, it is possible to suppress a game that attempts to enter the second winning opening despite the fact that time saving is not in progress (the time saving big hit is not made to appear).

  Specifically, the electric role object 640a receives the game ball which naturally falls on the electric role object 640a during the opening operation, and the game ball falling area a (a in FIG. 112) and the position where the game ball does not fall naturally. That is, the game ball guiding area b for guiding the game balls rolled from the game ball falling area a to the second winning opening 640 is provided.

  In other words, the length of the gaming ball induction area b (the rolling distance of the gaming ball) is at least the distance that the gaming ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when not being short of the motorized accessory 640a. By designing the game ball shorter than the distance the game ball rolls during the open time (0.5 seconds) during a longer and shorter time, the game ball dropped onto the motorized role 640a is surely ensured in the open operation during the short time It is possible to prevent the game ball dropped on the motorized winning object 640a from winning in the second winning opening by guiding to the 2 winning opening 640 and in the opening operation when the time is not short.

  Next, contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. (A) to (c) of FIG. 118 are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first hit type selection table 202b selects the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640 and the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the first winning opening 64 And a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the jackpot based on the first winning opening 64 is a jackpot type C, the jackpot C (16R time short-lived jackpot) is selected if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. In the case of "50 to 99", the jackpot D (16R time short non-hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), at the time of big hit based on the second winning opening 640, the big hit C (16R hour short) (in the case of the value "0 to 99") regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2. Yes) is selected.

  Next, the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202e.

  The small hitting type selection table 202 e is a small hitting based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hitting selection table 202 e 1 for selecting the small hitting type, and a small hitting of the small hitting based on the second winning opening 640. There is a special symbol 2 small hitting selection table 202e2 for selecting the type (see FIG. 119 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), at the time of small hitting based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 is selected when the value of “0 to 1” is small hitting C (V passable), In the case of "2-99", a small hit E (V can not pass) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), at the time of small hitting based on the second winning opening 640, the value of the first hit type counter C5 is small hitting C (V passable) in the case of “0 to 49”. A small hit D (V passable) is selected in the case of "50 to 99".

  Although the details will be described later, in the present control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V prize winning apparatus 900 is set according to the small hitting type. Specifically, in the small hitting game with the small hitting C and D, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is operating, and the game ball can enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. On the other hand, in the small hitting game by the small hitting E, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V prize winning apparatus 900 is not operating. The game ball can not enter the special discharge flow path 900 e 2. That is, small hits C and D are small hits to which a jackpot is given by the game ball passing through the V winning switch 900 e 3 thereafter, and small hits E are small hits to which a jackpot is not given.

  In addition, in this control example, the type of jackpot to be awarded is determined according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot awarded after the small jack C is the jackpot C (16R hour short holding jackpot), the small jack The jackpot given after D is configured to be a jackpot D (16R time short hit no jackpot).

  In this control example, the type of jackpot to be awarded is determined according to the type of small jack, but as the other specifications, it is the case that the lottery result of the second special symbol is small jack and Also, determine the type of jackpot by the jackpot selection table (acquire the jackpot right only), and execute the jackpot which acquired the right just before the gaming ball passes the V prize switch 900e3 in the subsequent small hit game You may By doing this, it is possible for the player to select a small hit passing the V winning switch 900 e 3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to lottery results of special symbols are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)); The time shortening variation pattern table 202d4 is at least defined. Note that in the present control example, a positive change state is not provided, so the out-of-order (positive change) change pattern table 202d3 is omitted. Further, the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those in the first control example described above, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (d), the time-shorting fluctuation pattern table 202d4 defines the fluctuation pattern during time-spacing. Specifically, in the case of out-of-time, during a short-time out, the out-of-range fluctuation pattern (0.5 seconds) becomes a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1; In the case of the jackpot, it is defined that the jackpot is 20 seconds. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in the case of deviation during time saving may be long (10 seconds), and may be the same length as the small hitting.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in the present control example has at least the V-inlet passage counter 223 j, the round number accumulation counter 223 k, and the continuation determination counter 223 m (see FIG. 124 (b)). . The ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The V entrance passage counter 223 j is a counter for counting gaming balls having passed through the detection port 900 a 1 of the V prize device 900. The V entrance passage counter 203 j is incremented by one when the V entrance passage command transmitted when the gaming ball passes the detection opening 900 a 1 is received (S 5014 in FIG. 144). The V entrance passage counter 203 j is referred to when setting a presentation effect command in the V passage process (S 5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the presentation effect command is set in the V passage process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

  The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the jackpot game when the jackpot or the jackpot continues. The round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144), and the continuation determination counter 223m receives a jackpot end command. If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). In the voice lamp control device 113, the round number command for display is set based on the round number cumulative counter 203k (S5005 in FIG. 144), and the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 203k is the third symbol display It will be displayed on the device 81.

  The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter used to determine whether or not a big hit or a small hit is continued, and is used to determine whether the above-described round number accumulation counter 223k is to be initialized. The continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when the small hitting start command of the small hitting C is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and is decremented by 1 when the small hitting start command of the small hitting D is received. (See S5015 in FIG. 144). The continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when the big hit end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144), and if the continuation determination counter is 0, that is, when the small hitting D is repeated twice, the large hitting and the small hitting are performed. It is determined that the continuation of the hit has ended, and the round number accumulation counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

  The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 143) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the flow of jackpots in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the gaming state is divided into a special view 1 (hereinafter also described as special 1) gaming state (left-handed gaming) and a special figure 2 (hereinafter also described special 2) gaming state (right-handed gaming) Be The special figure 1 gaming state is a normal gaming state in which the game ball is shot by aiming at the first winning opening 64. If the first special symbol is drawn based on the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening 64 and the jackpot type of the drawing result is the jackpot C, then the winning for the second winning opening 640 is made after the jackpot is over A time saving game state (in FIG. 122, described as time saving) is provided. When transitioning to the time saving game state, a right-handed game is performed in which the game ball is fired to the right of the game board 13 to aim at the second winning opening 640 disposed on the right side of the game board 13. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the lottery result of the first special symbol is the jackpot D, since the time saving game state is not provided after the end of the jackpot, the special figure 1 game state will be performed again. Moreover, in this control example, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, and there is also a route which becomes a big hit (V winning) when the small hit type is a small hit C. In this case, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the time saving game state.

  Next, the lottery of the second special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640, the probability of the jackpot becoming a state advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set high ing. In this control example, it has a reserve storage function to reserve and store the right to receive the lottery based on the second special symbol, during the variation of the second special symbol (more specifically, the variation display of the second special symbol is started The second special symbol that is currently changing the right to perform the lottery based on the winning combination if the game ball wins to the second winning opening 640 after the stop display from the to the final display)) It can be put on hold (pending upper limit = 1) until it is confirmed and displayed.

  Next, the flow of the jackpot in the game during the short time in the special view 2 gaming state will be described. In this state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed. As described earlier in FIGS. 117 and 119, most of the lottery contents of the second special symbol are distributed to small hits. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a jackpot (V prize) via a small hit in order to increase the jackpot probability of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hitting type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hitting C, time saving game state is granted again after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when the small hitting type is small hitting D, since the time saving game state is not provided after the end of the big hit, transition is made during non-time short that special game 2 game state time short game is not provided.

  Next, among the special figure 2 gaming states, the flow of the jackpot in the non-time short game will be described. In this state, as described above, the drawing of the second special symbol stored on hold is executed by the holding storage function of the second special symbol. As a result of the lottery, if the small hitting type is a small hitting C, since the time saving game is granted after the end of the big hit, it shifts to the time saving game state. On the other hand, when the small hitting type is the small hitting D, since the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and there is no hold storage, it shifts to the special figure 1 game state. In addition, since this state is short and short, new pending storage can not be acquired.

  In this control example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the symbol hit of the jackpot type jackpot C may be selected.

  In other words, it is designed to perform the drawing based on the second special symbol, which is an advantageous drawing for the player, at least twice using the above-mentioned hold function, and after entering the special view 2 gaming state, As long as the small hit D is not selected twice in a row, it is possible to loop the special figure 2 gaming state.

  FIG. 123 is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the second winning opening 640 to the occurrence of the big hit game in this control example, and (a) is a lottery result based on the winning to the second winning opening 640 is small. It is a hit, and the jackpot (V prize) by passing the special discharge path 900 e 2, (b) explains the case where the lottery result based on the prize for the second prize opening is a jackpot (per symbol) is there. The details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

  First, description will be made with reference to FIG. 123 (a). Based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640, the main control device 110 performs variation control of the second special symbol. At that time, in the display control device 114, a second special symbol variation effect that indicates that the second special symbol is being changed is executed. The time of the second special symbol variation effect performed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 100 starts the small hitting control, the V inlet solenoid provided in the V prize device 900, the flow passage solenoid 900k, and the staying solenoid 209a are turned on ( Fig. 113 (a)). In this state, the player aims at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 and shoots the gaming balls, so a plurality of gaming balls enter the V winning device 900, one of which is retained by the staying member 900n. In the staying state (900h in FIG. 113), the other gaming balls usually flow down the discharge flow passage 900e1. The time for the small hitting effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

  Next, the flow of the small hitting control by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the time for the entire small hitting control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hitting control is started, the V inlet solenoid of the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the open / close door 900f1 is closed. By closing the open / close door 900f1, the new game ball does not win in the V prize device 900. Next, after the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the staying solenoid 209a is turned off, the staying member 900n is opened (retracted state), and the gaming ball retained by the staying member 900n flows to the special discharge path 900e2. I will. The setting time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball existing in the V prize winning apparatus 900 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1 when the setting time t1 elapses, so the V winning when the setting time t2 has elapsed Only the gaming balls that have been retained by the retention member 900 n in the device 900 will flow down the special discharge flow passage 900 e 2. Next, when the set time t3 (1 second) elapses, the flow path solenoid 900k is turned off, and the opening piece of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2 is closed by the induction piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to allow the gaming ball flowing down the special discharge flow passage 900e2 to flow downstream of the movable range of the induction piece 900h2 when the set time t2 has elapsed.

  As described above, by driving the staying solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference, the guiding piece 900h2 and the holding member 900n are held even if the game ball is held by the holding member 900n within the movable range of the induction piece 900h2. Since it can be made to flow down to special discharge flow path 900e2 certainly without interference with the game ball made to stagnate, compactization of a device can be attained.

  Finally, the main control device 110 ends the small hitting game control, performs the big hit game control, and opens the specific winning opening based on the fact that the gaming ball having flowed down the special discharge flow passage 900e2 has passed the V prize switch 900e3. Be done.

  Next, points different from FIG. 123 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). In FIG. 123 (b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the winning on the second winning opening 640 is a big hit (per symbol), the operation of the V winning device 900 is not performed. That is, after the variation control of the first special symbol by the main control device 110 ends, the jackpot control is started. In the meantime, the second special symbol variation effect is executed in the display control device 114 to indicate that the second special symbol is in the process of variation.

  Here, the relationship between the effect which the display control apparatus 114 performs in FIG. 123 (a), and the time of the effect which the display control apparatus 114 performs in FIG. 123 (b) is demonstrated. In FIG. 123 (a), the sum of the variation time (10 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hitting presentation time (10 seconds) is set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123 (b) the variation time of the second special symbol Is set at 20 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V prize winning mentioned above or the symbol hit, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a ) In order to match the timing at which the game is released, and by configuring in this way, the player is made not to grasp the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect that the display control device executes is enjoyed until the end Can.

  Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 (a) shows an effect image at the start of the time saving game in this control example. The variable display area showing the variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of lottery reservations of the second special symbol on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81 On the lower side of the third symbol display device 81, a reserve display area indicating a comment display and a comment area for guiding a right-handed game is provided, and in the central part, an effect area is provided in which a story is developed as the game progresses. It is done. In FIG. 124 (a), since the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 640, a display showing that the fluctuation display area is not fluctuating is not held in the hold display area. The indication shown is, and in the comment area, the current mode name and the right-hand notice are displayed.

  FIG. 124 (b) shows a representation image in which the second special symbol is changing. The point different from FIG. 124 (b) is that the variable display area is displayed to indicate that the second special symbol is being changed, and that a branch road is displayed in the effect area. In the effect area, during the second special symbol change, an effect is made that the character moves deep into the cave, and the game ball is won in the second winning opening 640, that is, when the display with the hold is displayed in the hold area Follow one side of the fork. In this manner, the game ball in the second special symbol change is performed by causing the development of the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 to be performed based on the winning on the second winning opening 640. It is possible to prevent the stop of the fire and ensure that the second special symbol can be reserved. In this control example, one of the branch roads is selected based on the display of withholding, and control to proceed is shown, but it is also possible to go along the branch road every time the game ball wins in the second winning opening, It is also possible to select a path to proceed by operating a predetermined operation means, and control to proceed to the selected path caused by the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 640 generated after the completion of the selection . Furthermore, the color tone and design of the divided road may be changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol during the variation or the lottery result of the second special symbol held. By doing in this way, the player can participate in the development of the story to be advanced in the effect area and can enjoy the effect suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol, so the game during the second special symbol change It is possible to further prevent the firing stop of the ball.

  Next, FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image after the change is stopped in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. In the effect area, the door shows a small hit, the variable display area shows a small hit, the hold display area shows a display indicating that there is a hold, and the comment area shows a right-handed notice display. When the effect image is displayed, the V prize apparatus 900 is open at the lower right side of the game board, so a comment is displayed to aim at the V prize apparatus 900 by hitting the right, and the V prize is won. In the effect area, an effect that the character destroys the door is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900. In addition, the color tone and design of the door displayed in the effect area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol of the variation or the lottery result of the held second special symbol.

  The same effect image is displayed at the same timing even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. However, as described above in the explanation of FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still changing, the variable display area is displayed while it is changing. Therefore, it is made difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit by making the display display area smaller or providing it other than the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Further, if the variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out is 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in this control example), it is sufficient to display an effect image in which the door does not come out at this timing.

  Next, FIG. 125 (b) is an effect image when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V prize device 900, and in the effect area, FIG. 125 (a) Monsters appear from the door displayed in the staging area. The types of characters appearing from the inside of the door will be described later with reference to FIG. When a monster appears, it shifts to the jackpot effect shown in FIG. FIG. 126 (a) shows an effect image during a jackpot. Since the main effect image in the jackpot is battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the hold display area are moved to an inconspicuous part or an appropriate position outside the third symbol display device 81. Instead, a jackpot round number display and a jackpot display (not shown) in the jackpot are displayed. FIG. 126 (b) shows a representation image when a monster is defeated in a battle production during a jackpot. When a monster is defeated in the battle effect, there is at least one more jackpot (a state in which a time-saving game is awarded after a jackpot or a jackpot of a lottery result of the second special symbol being held). On the other hand, FIG. 126 (c) shows a representation image when a monster is defeated in a battle production during a jackpot. When defeated by a monster in a battle effect, it is in a state to shift to a normal gaming state (there is no suspension of the second special symbol, and no time saving game is awarded after a big hit). It should be noted that a so-called resurrection effect may be provided such as resurrection and defeating a monster after the effect image to be defeated in the battle is once displayed. Also, if the player does not win the V during a small hit, the door will not be opened (not shown).

  Next, characters appearing from the door displayed in FIG. 125 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 (a) is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first random number counter value C1 is "0" in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2).

  In FIG. 127 (b), both the lottery result of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol being held are both short timed small hits (in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2, the small hit type counter value C5 is “0-0 49 ") is displayed. In other words, at least three more times, it becomes a premiere effect in which a jackpot is to be awarded.

  Although the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described above, any jackpot based on the second special symbol lottery as shown in FIG. 123 starts the jackpot state Since the timing to set the same timing and to display the type of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is also the same timing as shown in FIG. 125 (b) and FIG. 127, the lottery of the second special symbol to the player It can make it difficult to grasp the result.

  Also, by performing the display of FIG. 124 (b) and FIG. 125 (a), the stop of the game ball emission by the player is suppressed, the suspension of the second special symbol is assuredly acquired, and the winning of the V prize device is achieved. Can be done reliably.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller in Fifth Control Example
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth control example, the V entrance pass processing and the V pass processing are executed in the timer interrupt processing, the special symbol variation processing in the timer interrupt processing, the start winning processing, and the ordinary symbol, as compared with the first control example described above. The difference is that the partial process of the variation process is changed and the point that the big hit control process 2 and the small hit control process are executed in the main process. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 128, the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the fifth control example. Of the timer interrupt process, in each of the processes of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109, each process of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 63) in the first control example. Since the same processing as in the above is executed, the detailed description thereof is omitted. In the fifth control example, the special symbol variation process of S104 (see FIG. 129) executed in the timer interrupt process, the start winning process of S105 (see FIG. 134), and the normal symbol variation process of S106 (see FIG. 136). The first control example is different from the first control example in that a part of the processing in), the V inlet passage processing in S140 (see FIG. 137) described later, and the V passage processing in S141 (see FIG. 138) are performed.

  First, differences from the first control example of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128), and the process of S240 to S244 is different from the first control example. The other processes are the same as those of the first control example described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special symbol variation start process 2 of S240 is performed instead of the special symbol variation start process of the first control example (S213, see FIG. 64). The details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132.

  The processes of S241 to S242 are performed instead of the process of S219 of the first control example. Specifically, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit after the fluctuation time (S214: Yes) (S216: Yes), a specific winning opening opening scenario is set based on the big hit type. (S217), the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the time saving medium low counter 203f is set to 0, and this processing is ended.

  Whether the jackpot start timing or jackpot game is in jackpot control processing 2 (FIG. 140) described later by setting the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot flag 203v2 on in the process of S241 It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

  Further, by setting the time-span-medium counter 203f to 0 in the process of S242, the time-savings game is ended when the big hit game is started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S216 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S243).

  If it is determined in the process of S243 that the current lottery result is a small hit (S243: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S244), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S243 that the current lottery result is not a small winning, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed as in the first control example described above, and the present process is ended.

  In this control example, as described above, since it is configured to be a small hit in the lottery of each special symbol, when it is determined by the process of S243-244 that the lottery result is a small hit, start a small hit game It is configured to Details of the process of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed in place of the special symbol variation start process of S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240), first, it is determined whether or not it is time saving (S4001). If the time is not short (S4001: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when the time is short (S4001: Yes), the time short start process (S4003) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Next, the normal variation start process (S4002) and the time variation start process (S4003), which are executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) described above, will be described.

  First, the normal change start process (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

  In the normal change start process, first, data of the execution area in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). Thereafter, a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired type of special symbol (S4102). Specifically, in the case of the drawing of the first special symbol based on entering the first winning opening 64, determination of the big hit or the small hit with reference to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on entering the second winning opening 640, it determines the big hit or small hit with reference to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) .

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S4103). If the lottery result is a jackpot (S4103: Yes), a display pattern for a normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S4104). Thereafter, the normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4105), and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small hit or not (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). Thereafter, the normal small hitting variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4108), and the process is ended.

  If the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), the display mode at the time of the normal removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the normal removal is determined based on the number of holding balls (S4110), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the time saving change start process (S4003) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the time variation start process (S4003) executed in the special symbol change start process 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). The short change start process (S4003) is different from the above-described normal change start process (S4002) in that a time-short display mode and a change pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , I omit the detailed explanation. The variation pattern for time shortening determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 is determined based on the variation pattern table for time shortening 202d4 (see FIG. 120D) as described above.

  Next, the small hitting start setting process which is the process added in the fifth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240).

  In the small hitting start setting process (S244), first, an open scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set (S4301). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is small hitting type C or D (S4302). When it is not small hitting classification C or D (S4302: No), processing of S4303 to S4306 is skipped and it shifts to processing of S4307.

  If it is the small hitting type C or D (S4302: Yes), an open scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether the small hitting type is C (S4304). If the small hit type is C (S4304: Yes), the jackpot type D is set in the V-pass jackpot type value at the time of V passage, and the process shifts to the processing of S4307.

  On the other hand, if the small hitting type is not C (S4304: No), the jackpot type D is set in the V passing jackpot type value, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  When the process of S4302, S4305 or S4306 is finished, the start of the small hitting is set based on the small hitting type (S4307). Next, the small hitting start flag 203w1 and the small hitting middle flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

  In the start winning process (S105), the processes of S401 to S405 are executed as in the first control example described above. After the process of S405, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area (S406). In S406, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

  Next, the processes of S407 to S408 are performed. After the process of S408, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in order to set the upper limit of the number of reservations in the lottery of the second special symbol to 1 in this control example, it is configured in this way.

  If it is determined in the process of S409 that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processes of S410 to S411 are executed as in the first control example. After the process of S411, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area (S412). In S412, as in the process of S406 described above, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

  When the process of S407, S409, or S412 is finished, the pre-reading process 2 (S440) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, prefetch processing 2 (S440) will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 135, instead of the pre-reading process of S413 executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 66) of the first control example, the pre-reading process 2 (S440) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 134) It is a flowchart shown.

  In the pre-reading process 2, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning combination (S4401). If there is no new winning combination (S4401: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when there is a new winning combination (S4401: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is a winning of the first special symbol (S4402).

  In the process of S4402, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table The lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hitting type are acquired (S4403), and the process shifts to the processing of S4405.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is the second special symbol in the processing of S4402 (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table Based on the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hitting type are acquired (S4404), and the process proceeds to S4405.

  Next, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 128). In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), the processing of S640 is executed instead of the processing of S608 to S611 because the change of the lottery probability in the lottery of the normal symbol is eliminated from the first control example described above. And the process of S641 to S644 instead of the process of S616, and the point of eliminating the change of the fluctuation time depending on whether or not the time is short (the process of S619 and S621 is deleted). Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the normal symbol variation processing (S106) in the present control example, the processing of S601 to S607 is executed as in the first control example. After the process of S607, the lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of normal symbols, and the probability of being hit with the normal symbols is always constant.

  When the process of S640 is finished, the processes of S612 to S615 are executed as in the first control example. In the process of S614, it is determined that the time is short (S614: Yes), and in the process of S615, if it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is not in progress (S615: No), the normal symbol time short first flag 203y is on. It is determined whether there is any (S641).

  If it is determined in the process of S641 that the normal symbol time short first time flag 203y is on (S641: Yes), the first normal symbol variation process is executed in the granted short game, so In order to win many game balls in the 2 winning opening 640, the open time and the number of times of the electric role piece 640a are set to "1 time for 5 seconds" (S642). As a result, the motorized role product 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), and the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is guided to the second winning port 640 during that time. Therefore, when the first normal symbol variation process in the time saving game is executed, many gaming balls enter the second winning opening 640, and the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol lottery) is suspended The number of balls can be accumulated up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

  When the process of S642 is completed, the normal symbol time short first time flag 203y is set to OFF (S643), and the process proceeds to S620.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S641 that the normal symbol time short first time flag 203y is off (S641: No), it is after the first normal symbol variation processing is executed, and based on the second winning opening 640 Since the number of holding balls in the lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and number of times of the electric combination 640a is "0.5 seconds x 2 times" (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric combination is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and during that time, only some of the gaming balls passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are the second winning openings It will be led to 640. Therefore, at the time of execution of the normal symbol variation processing after the first time in the time saving game, many gaming balls do not enter the second winning opening 640, and can enter the V prize device 900 disposed therebelow. Therefore, during the time saving game, it is possible to suppress such a problem that the gaming ball enters only the second winning opening 640 and the gaming ball does not enter the V prize device 900.

  In addition, the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric character set 640a set in the process of S644 is such that the game ball having passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 can not enter the second winning opening 640 Instead of time, a part of the gaming balls that have passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is a time when it is possible to enter the ball. Thereby, even when the game ball is not fired at the time of execution of the first normal symbol variation processing, the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol is executed during the subsequent execution of the normal symbol variation processing) It is possible to store the number of holding balls of the lottery) up to the upper limit (1 in this control example). On the other hand, the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric character set 640 a set in the process of S 617 may allow the gaming ball having passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 to enter the second winning opening 640. It is an impossible time. Thereby, when the time saving game is not awarded, it is possible to realize the game characteristic that the game ball is not entered into the second winning opening 640.

  When the process of S617, 643 or S644 is finished, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is ended. Thereby, in the present control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 3 seconds regardless of whether the time is short.

  In addition, about the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, it is not limited to this, You may give a time-saving function interlocked with the time-shortening function of a special symbol. For example, during time saving, the variation time may be 2 seconds. Further, in the present control example, the condition for ending the operation of the motorized combination 640a is only the passage of time, but other than that, the combination of the predetermined number (for example, the upper limit number of reserved storages) The operation of 640 a may be ended. By doing this, when the pending storage reaches the upper limit number, the motorized steering gear 640a immediately operates to close, and the first normal symbol time reduction operation ends. Then, the second and subsequent regular symbol time reduction operations will be started. Therefore, at the time of the small hitting game start where V winning a prize mouth 900a of V winning a prize device 900 is opened, it can control that electric portable object 640a becomes open state for a long period of time, it is possible to play small hitting game smoothly .

  Next, the V inlet passage processing (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passage process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128).

  In the V entrance passing process (S140), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (S4501). If it is determined that the small hit is in progress in the process of S4501 (S4501: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (S4502), and this process is ended. If it is not in the small hit (S4502: No), it is a case that the game ball enters the V prize device 900 despite not being a small hit game, so set an error command (S4503), this processing finish.

  The V entrance pass command set in the process of S4502 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. Thereby, effects during a small hit game based on entering the ball into the V prize device 900 can be executed (see FIG. 122).

  Next, the V passage process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S141). The V passage process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  In the V-passing process, first, a jackpot type value at the time of V-passing is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot C is met (S4602). When it corresponds to the jackpot C (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to ON (S4603), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4604.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot does not correspond to the jackpot C in the process of S4602 (S4602: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot D is applied (S4606). If it is determined in the process of S4606 that the jackpot D is determined (S4606: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S4607), and the process proceeds to the process of S4604. When the processing of S4603 or S4607 is finished, a V passage command is set (S4604), the time saving / midday counter 203f is set to 0 (S4605), and this processing is ended. In the process of S4605, the time saving game is ended by setting the time saving medium counter 203f to zero.

  If it is determined in the process of S4606 that the jackpot does not apply (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and the process ends. In this control example, the game ball can pass the V prize switch 900 e 3 of the V prize device 900 at a small hitting C or a small hitting D, and a large hitting C or big hitting D is set to the V passing jackpot type value Only if Therefore, if the V passing process (S141) executed based on the game ball passing the V prize switch 900e3 is executed if the V passing jackpot type value is not the big hit C or the big hit D, it is illegal It is considered that the game ball is awarded to the V prize winning switch 900 e 3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S4608, an output of an error is executed, and a fraud can be detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of main processing in the fifth control example. In this main process, instead of the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example, jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed, and the small jack control process (S1041) is executed after execution of the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) They differ in that they are

  The other processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are the same as the processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example, respectively, so the details thereof Description is omitted.

  The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, or the first variable This processing is for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65 a of the winning device 65.

  In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the big hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4701, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to OFF (S4702), the opening command is set (S4703), and this processing is ended. .

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display jackpot start command, an effect of starting a jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S4704). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the big hit medium flag 203v2 is on. In the process of S4704, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S4704: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S4705). If it is the start timing of a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S4707) . After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present control example, when the continued jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, a display round number command according to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continued jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S4705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, the total number of balls) is generated in the first variable winning device 65 10) When winning a prize, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S4708, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the big hit end (S4710). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is finished, it is determined that it is the timing of the big hit end.

  In the process of S4710, if it is the timing of the big hit end (S4710: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S4711), and the big hit flag is set off (S4712).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a jackpot C (S4713). In the process of S4713, if it is determined that the jackpot C (16R short time big hit) (S4713: Yes), set the hour counter during the short 203 f (S4714), set the normal symbol time short first flag 203y on Then (S4715), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4713 that the jackpot D (16R time short nonstop) (S4713: No), the process of S4714 and S4715 is skipped, and the process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command according to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an effect of jackpot end. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, when it is not the timing of the big hit end (S4710: No), this process is finished.

  Next, the small hitting control process (S1041) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). The small hitting control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hitting state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the small hitting, V This is a process for opening or closing the open / close door 900f1 of the winning device 900.

  In the small hitting control process, first, it is determined whether the small hitting of the special symbol is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the process of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4801, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to OFF (S4802), and the small hit start command is set (S4803).

  The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 is voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a small hit start command for display to the display control device 114. When the display small hit start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting a small hit on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  When the process of S4803 ends, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are set to ON based on the open scenario (S4804), operation of the retention member is started (S4805), and the process is ended.

  The open scenario to be referred to in the process of S4804 is set in the above-described small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set regardless of the small hit type. The 900k open scenario is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, the open / close door 900f1 of the V prize winning apparatus 900 is opened in all the small hitting games, and the game winning ball can be entered into the V prize winning apparatus 900. On the other hand, the gaming ball having entered the V prize winning apparatus 900 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 only in the small hitting C or D where the flow path solenoid 900k is turned on. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which a big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which a big hit is not given.

  In addition, since the operation of the retaining member is started (the retaining solenoid 209a is turned on) in the processing of S4805, it becomes possible to hold one gaming ball in the distribution destination region 900h3.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is not the timing when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S4806). As a small hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the small hit of the special symbol (including the small hit of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, It includes the middle of the predetermined time after the small hitting game end of the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit middle flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S4804, when the small hit of the special symbol is not in progress (S4804: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S4806 that the small symbol of the special symbol is being hit (S4806: Yes), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the V inlet is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the open / close door 900f1 of the V prize device 900 is opened, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are provided to the V prize device 900 When winning, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  It should be noted that the closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the V winning opening 900a.

  In the process of S4807, when the closing condition of the open / close door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V inlet solenoid is set to OFF to close the open / close door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 ( S4808), in order to terminate the operation of the retention member, the retention solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S4809), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the open / close door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the small hitting end (S4810). Specifically, it is determined that the small hitting end timing is reached after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) elapses after the closing condition of the V inlet described above is satisfied. As a result, since the small hitting end processing (off of the flow path solenoid) can be executed after the operation of the staying member 900n is finished, the gaming ball staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 is switched to the V prize switch 900e3. You can enter the ball surely.

  In the process of S4810, if it is the small hitting end timing (S4810: Yes), the small hitting middle flag 203w2 is set to OFF (S4811), the small hitting end command is set (S4811), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S4813), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4810, when it is not the timing of the small hitting end (S4810: No), the present process is finished as it is.

  Here, the details of the small hitting end process (S4812) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end process (S4812). The small hitting end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hitting control process that it is the timing of the small hit ending.

  In the small hitting end process (S4812), first, the channel solenoid 900k is set to OFF (S4901), and it is determined whether the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902). If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the V flag 203x2 is on (S4902: Yes), the game ball passes the V prize switch 900e3 of the V prize apparatus 900 during the small hitting game, so V A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the winning switch 900 e 3 is performed.

  Specifically, an open scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the start of jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is not on in the processing of S4902 (S4902: No), the game ball does not pass the V winning switch 900e3 to the small hitting game ball, so a big hit is awarded. In order to end without doing, the small hitting end command is set (S4907), it moves to the processing of S4909.

  The small hitting end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 is voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command according to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an effect of jackpot end.

  When the processing of S4906 or S4907 ends, the value of the V-pass jackpot type value 203x1 is cleared (S4908), and this processing ends.

<About the control processing which the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example executes>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that processing based on reception of a win-related command is executed in command determination processing 2 (S1530). The other parts are the same, and the same parts are given the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 143, command determination processing 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S1530). This command determination process (S1511) is a process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main control device 110, as in the first control example described above.

  In command determination processing 2 (S1530), processing from S1601 to S1610 is executed as in the first control example. Thereafter, if it is determined in the process of S1609 that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641). Transfer to processing. On the other hand, when the prize information command has not been received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1643), and then the process proceeds to the process of S1619. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1619.

  In the process of S1619, as in the first control example, the process according to the other command is executed (S1619), and then the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the hit related process (S1643) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process (S1643). The hit-related process (S1643) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 143) that a hit-related command has been received.

  In the hit-related processing, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S5002), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, FIG. 125 (b), FIG. 127) indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S5003). When it is determined in the process of S5003 that the round number command has been received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter 223k (S5004). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223k (S5005), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the round number command has not been received (S5003: No), it is determined whether the big hit end command has been received (S5006). If it is determined in the process of S5006 that a big hit end command has been received (S5006: Yes), a big hit end command for display is set (S5007), and it is then determined whether the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 or not. (S5008).

  In the process of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), this is a case where the big hit D is continuously executed twice, and it is the timing when the continuation of the big hit is ended, The round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5008 that the continuation determination counter is not 0 (S5008: No), this process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the big hit end command has not been received (S5006: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S5010).

  If it is determined in the process of S5010 that the small hitting start command has been received (S5006: Yes), the small hitting start command for display is set based on the small hitting type (S5011), and then the small hitting started It is determined whether or not the game is a small hit C (S5012). In the process of S5012, when it is determined that the small hit game to be started is a small hit C (S5012: Yes), then a big hit game based on the big hit C is given, so the number of consecutive runs of big hit D The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hitting C is not made in the process of S5012 (S5012: No), it is then determined whether the small hitting D or not (S5014). In the process of S5014, when it is determined that it is a small hit D (S5014: Yes), since a big hit game based on the big hit D is given thereafter, the continuation determination counter for counting the number of times of continuous execution of the big hit D This process is ended by subtracting 1 from 223 m (S5015). In the process of S5014, when it is determined that it is not the small hitting D (S5014: No), the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5010 that the small hitting start command has not been received (S5010: No), it is determined whether the small hitting end command has been received (S5016).

  If it is determined in the process of S5016 that the small hitting end command has been received (S5016: Yes), a small hitting end command for display is set to execute an effect that suggests the small hitting game end (S5017) , End this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5016 that the small hitting end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passing command has been received (S5018).

  If it is determined in the process of S5018 that the V inlet passage command has been received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V inlet passage counter 223j (S5019). The V entrance passage counter 223 j added here is referred to in order to determine the number of ball entry into the V prize device 900 during the small hitting game in the V passing process described later.

  After the processing of S5109, in order to execute effects based on entering the ball into the V prize device 900 during small hitting game (for example, see FIG. 125 (a)), the V entry passage display command is set (S5020) ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5018 that the V inlet passage command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether the V passage command has been received (S5021).

  If it is determined in the process of S502 that the V passage command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V passage process is executed to execute the process based on the entry of the V winning device 900 to the V winning switch 900e3. (S5022), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5021 that the V passage command has not been received (S5021: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the V passage process (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S5022). The V-passing process (S5022) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the V-passing command has been received in the win-related process (see FIG. 144).

  In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether the small hitting game being executed is a small hitting C (S5101). When it is determined in the process of S5101 that it is a small hitting C (S5101: Yes), next, it is determined whether there is a hit in holding (S5102).

  In the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is no hit in the hold (S5102: No), although there is no big hit or small hit based on the hold ball, but a big hit C is given based on the passage of the V prize switch 900e3. is there. Here, the jackpot C is a short time jackpot, and the probability of being a small jack C or D (ie, a jackpot C or D after that) in a short game is "397/399". Therefore, in order to execute a 2V effect that is an effect that suggests that the probability that a jackpot game will be awarded in two consecutive games is high, a 2V effect command for display is set (S5105), and the process shifts to the process of S5106.

  The display 2V effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the 2V command for display, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests that the probability that the jackpot game will be awarded two consecutive times is high.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that there is a hit (S5102: Yes), jackpot C is awarded based on the passage of V prize switch 900e3, and jackpot or jackpot is granted based on the holding ball. It is the case. That is, there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be executed in two consecutive times, and the jackpot game will be executed based on the small hit in the hold, so the probability that the jackpot game will be awarded in three consecutive cases will be high.

  Here, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103).

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: Yes), an effect that suggests that the probability that the jackpot game will be awarded for three consecutive times is high (for example, FIG. In order to execute), 3V effect command for display is set (S5104), it moves to the processing of S5106. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223 j is larger than 5 (S 5103: No), the game ball is not sufficiently fired during the small hitting game, etc. If the ball is not enough. In this case, in the present control example, the process of S5105 is executed to shift to the process of S5106 in order not to display an effect that suggests that the probability that the jackpot game will be awarded in three consecutive times is high. Thereby, even when there are few winning balls based on entering the V prize device 900, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to enter the gaming ball into the V prize device 900.

  The display 3V effect command set in the process of S5015 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 3V command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect (see, for example, FIG. 127 (b)) indicating that the probability that the jackpot game will be awarded three consecutive times is high. Do.

  When it is determined in the process of S5101 that the small hitting game being executed was not the small hitting C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit in holding (S5107). If it is determined in the process of S5107 that there is a hit in the hold (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the small hit C (S5108).

  In the process of S5108, when it is determined that there is a small hitting C in the hold (S5108: Yes), a jackpot game based on V passage is executed, and a small hitting C is awarded based on the holding ball (ie, 2 This is the case where there is a high probability that a continuous jackpot game will be awarded). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect (see, for example, FIG. 127 (b)) that suggests that the probability that jackpot games will be awarded in three consecutive steps is high, a display 3V effect command is set (S5109), It transfers to the process of S5106.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5108, when it is determined that the hold is not a small hitting C (S5108: No), a big hit game based on V passage is executed, and a small hitting D is given based on the holding ball (ie , 1 jackpot game is given)). Therefore, in this case, in order to perform an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is awarded in two consecutive times, a display 2V effect command is set (S5110), and the process proceeds to the process of S5106.

  In the process of S5107, when it is determined that there is no hit (S5107: No), since it is not the case that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the execution of the jackpot game based on V passage, the jackpot based on V passage In order to execute the effect that suggests that the display V effect is set, a display V effect command is set (S5111), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  The display V effect command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the V command for display, the third symbol display device 81 produces an effect indicating that a big hit game is provided based on the game ball passing the V prize switch 900 e 3 in the small hit game. indicate.

  When the process of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110 or S5111 is finished, the V entrance passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and the present process is ended.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in Fifth Control Example
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152. The fifth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that hit related command processing is executed when a hit related command is received. The other parts are the same, so the same parts are denoted with the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 146, the command determination process (S2302) in the present control example will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S2302). The command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and performing a process according to the determined command.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed as in the first control example described above. Next, in the process of S2412, when it is determined that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit related command (S2440).

  When it is determined in the process of S2440 that there is a hit related command (S2440: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S2441), and the process returns to the process of S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2440 that there is no hit related command (S2440: No), the other command process is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 147, the details of the hit related command process (S2441) will be described. The hit related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

  In the hit related command process (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is a display start command (S5201: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a). FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5202). This jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the win-related command process (FIG. 147), and the effect that suggests the start of jackpot is the third This processing is for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command processing (S5202), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the big hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). Thereafter, based on the jackpot start display data table, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set off (S5305) This process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is no display jackpot start command (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203. When the process of S5201 or S5202 ends, it is determined whether there is a display round number command (S5203). If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5204), and the process shifts to the process of S5205.

  The details of the round number command process (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing (S5204). This round number command process (S5204) is a process executed when it is determined that the display round number command has been received in the hit related command process (FIG. 147), and the round number in the jackpot game is updated. Is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect when playing a game.

  In round number command processing (S5204), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233 e is cleared (S 5402), and time data is set in the clock counter 233 h based on the round number display data table (S 5403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are set to be off (S5405), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205. When the process of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

  If it is determined in the process of S5205 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5205: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S5206). This jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the command determination process (FIG. 147), and the third symbol display effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game This is processing for causing the device 81 to display.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S5206), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table (S5503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are set to be off (S5505), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5205 that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5207.

  When the process of S5205 or S5206 is completed, it is determined whether there is a small hitting start command for display (S5207). If it is determined in the process of S5207 that there is a small hitting start command for display (S5207: Yes), the small hitting start command process is executed (S5208), and the process shifts to the process of S5209.

  Here, the details of the small hitting start command process (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hitting start command process (S 5208). The small hitting start command process (S5208) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hitting start command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and an effect that suggests the start of the small hitting game is This processing is for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hitting start command process (S5208), first, the small hitting start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). Thereafter, based on the small hit start display data table, the time data is set to the clock counter 233h (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5605) , End this process.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is no small hitting start command for display (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5209.

  When the process of S5207 or S5208 is completed, it is determined whether there is a small hitting end command for display (S5209). If it is determined in the process of S5209 that there is a small hitting end command (S5209: Yes), the small hitting end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to the process of S5211.

  Here, the details of the small hitting end command process (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). FIG. 150 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hitting end command process (S5210). This small hitting end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hitting end command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and an effect that suggests the small hitting game is over Is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hitting end command process (S5210), first, the small hitting end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized (S 5704), the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S 5705), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S5209 that the small hitting end command for display has not been received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5211.

  When the process of S5209 or S5210 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V inlet passage command (S5211). If it is determined in the process of S5211 that there is a display V inlet passage command (S5211: Yes), the V inlet passage command process is executed (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213.

  Here, the details of the V entrance passage command process (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (b). FIG. 150 (b) is a flowchart showing the V-inlet passage command processing (S5212). This V entrance passing command process (S5212) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the V entrance passing command has been received in the command determination process (FIG. 147), and to the V prize device 900 during the small hitting game It is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect based on the entering of the game ball.

  In the V entrance passage command processing (S5212), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S5803). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S5805), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5211 that there is no display V inlet passage command (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5213.

  When the process of S5211 or S5212 ends, it is determined whether there is a 3V effect command for display (S5213). If it is determined in the process of S5213 that there is a 3V effect command for display (S5213: Yes), 3V effect command process (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5215.

  Here, the details of the 3V effect command processing (S5214) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a flowchart showing 3V effect command processing (S5214). This 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the 3V effect command for display has been received. Is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that the “3 continues” three times.

  Specifically, as described above, the display 3V effect command is given a jackpot by the game ball passing the V prize switch 900 e 3 of the V prize device 900 during the small hit game, and becomes a jackpot C. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In 3V rendering command processing (S5214), first, a 3V rendering display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized (S 5904), the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S 5905), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5213 that there is no display 3V effect command (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5215.

  When the process of S5213 or S5214 is completed, it is determined whether there is a 2V effect command for display (S5215). If it is determined in the process of S5215 that there is a 2V effect command for display (S5215: Yes), 2V effect command process is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to S5217.

  Here, the details of the 2V effect command processing (S5216) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a flowchart showing 2V effect command processing (S5216). The 2V effect command process is a process that is executed when it is determined that the 2V effect command for display is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and 2V (two big wins at the end of the small hitting game) Is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that the operation is continued.

  Specifically, as described above, in the small hitting game, a jackpot is given when the gaming ball passes the V prize switch 900 e 3 of the V prize device 900 as described above, and the jackpot becomes D. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the 2V effect command processing (S5216), first, a 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized (S 6004), the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S 6005), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5215 that there is no display 2V effect command (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5217.

  When S5215 or S5216 is finished, it is determined whether there is a display V effect command (S5217). If it is determined in the process of S5217 that there is a display V effect command (S5217: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S5218), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5217 that there is no display V effect command (S5217: No), there is no command to be executed by the hit related command, and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 152, the details of the V effect command processing (S5218) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing V-effect command processing (S5218). The V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined that the display V effect command has been received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and V winning is achieved when the small hitting game is over. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900 e 3.

  In the V effect command processing (S5218), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233 f is initialized (S 6104), the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S 6105), and the process ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, it is shifted to a state (time saving gaming state) which is easy to receive the lottery of the second special symbol 2 V-winning device 900 is opened based on the lottery result of the special symbol, passing the specific area (special discharge flow path 900 e 2) in the V-winning device 900 (passing V prize switch 900 e 4) Is equipped.

  The pachinko machine 10 having such a game feature has a plurality of technical configurations for preventing the ball from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

  First, in the normal gaming state (a game aiming at the left side of the game board 13), the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not provided on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 is not opened. Provided only on the right side of the Secondly, based on the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 in the normal gaming state, the game ball is in a state of being easy to win the second winning opening (the motorized role 640a is open) Also, the time (0.2 seconds) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball is set as the time when the motorized role thing 640a is in the open state in the normal gaming state. Thirdly, the game ball falling area a that receives the game ball that has flowed down (naturally dropped) to the electric character 640 a and the game ball rolling from the game ball falling area a are received and guided to the second winning hole 640 It is possible to provide a game ball induction area b where the balls naturally dropped from the game board 13 are not buffered, and it is necessary for the game balls to roll on the game ball induction area b to win the second prize opening 640 The opening time of the motorized steering wheel 640a is made shorter than the time. Fourth, as a result of the drawing of the first special symbol by the main control unit 110, when the so-called small hit that is not a big hit but the V prize device 900 opens is selected, the special discharge flow provided with the V prize switch 900e4 In order to prevent the flow of the gaming ball to the road 900e2, two switching members 900h and two retaining members 900n are provided. It is composition such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

  Also, in the fifth control example, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second winning opening 640 (electric winning object 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65 from the downstream side of the flow path of the gaming ball. Although the arrangement is made with (specific winning hole 65a), the arrangement of various devices provided on the game board 13 may be changed as appropriate. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring due to the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 or the V winning device 900 during the jackpot state of the right-handed state, the normal symbol starting opening (through The first variable winning device 65 may be provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow down path more than all or part of the gate) 67, the second winning opening 640, and the V winning device 900. By configuring in this way, during the jackpot game, the launched game balls enter the first variable winning device 65 upstream of the flow-down path of the game balls, and thus to various devices provided downstream thereof. The ball can be prevented from entering and it is possible to prevent the ball from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order. In order to prevent this more reliably, the opening and closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow down path is opened, thereby the ball or passage opening of various devices provided on the downstream side. You should close it. In the event that entry or passage of gaming balls to various devices occurs by any chance other than the proper gaming order, detection signals from various switches for detecting the gaming balls provided on various devices and the current gaming state are used. It is good to give notice. About the notification contents in that case, when the game ball is detected inside V winning device 900 which is directly related to big hit game in normal game state, abnormal notification, passing normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 in normal game state If detected, by changing the urgency of the status notification and the notification, it becomes possible to quickly detect the situation where the game arcade clerk may be disadvantageous to the game arcade. In addition, as notification of abnormality, notification with sound larger than the game volume and signal output also to the outside, as condition notification, notification that instructs normal striking on the liquid crystal of the third symbol display device Conceivable.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the second winning port 640 (motor winning object 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65 (specification) Although arranged with the winning opening 65a), in order to smoothly enter the game ball to the V winning device 900 in the small hit game, the V winning device 900 above the second winning opening 640 (electric role 640a) May be provided. By configuring in this manner, even if the electric role product 640a is variably operated and becomes in the open state during the small hitting game, the entry of the game ball into the V prize device 900 is not affected. Also, the V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 during the small hit game, so that the electric bonus 640a performs variable operation during the small hit game Can be suppressed, and the entry of the game ball to the V prize winning apparatus 900 is not affected.

  Also, in this control example, the game ball to the inside of the V prize device 900 at the time of the small hitting game is used by using the configuration to delay the flow of the gaming ball in the gaming ball rolling surface of the V prize device 900 upper part and the upper surface of the open / close door 900f1. In addition to this, for example, a rotating body provided with ten pockets in which one gaming ball can be inserted in the V prize apparatus, one of which is provided on the gaming board 13 A V-pocket is provided with an opening that communicates with the special discharge path 900e2, and a game ball placed on the 10th ball at the start of a small hit game is stored in the V-pocket. A space may be provided for storage, and the game ball may pass the V prize switch 900 e 3 only when a predetermined number (10) of game balls stay in the space. In addition, control and configuration may be used in which the game balls rolling on the motorized accessory 640a are collectively entered into the V prize device 900 by using the advancing and retracting operation of the motorized accessory 640a.

  In addition, the game ball may be made to smoothly enter the V winning device 900 in the small hit game by providing a restriction on the number of times of the normal symbol. Specifically, the regular symbol variation time (for example, 3 seconds) and the electric utility 640a operation time (for example, 2 seconds) during the short time than the variation time (for example, 22 seconds) of the second special symbol for which the lottery result is small. The time in which the time (for example, 5 seconds) in which the time is added is reduced may be reduced to the number of times (in the case of the above example, the time may be reduced to four). By configuring in this way, since the time saving game of the normal symbol is finished at the start of the small hitting game, it is possible to shorten the time during which the electric role thing 640a performs variable operation during the small hitting game. Also, control may be performed to extend the variation time of the normal symbol when the small hit game is started, or to prohibit the variable movement of the electric role 640a, and change it to open for a short time (0.2 seconds) Control that extends the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or prohibits the variable movement of the motorized actor 640a when the second special symbol's reserved memory reaches the upper limit, and changes it to a short time open (0.2 seconds) You may In addition, the time saving of the normal symbol here means that the variation time is shortened only for the first predetermined number of times in the time saving game of the normal symbol besides the control for internally terminating the time saving game and returning to the normal game, After the predetermined number of times, the variation time is set longer, or the variable operation time of the motorized combination 640a is set longer only the first predetermined number of times, and after the predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set shorter. , Is a concept that includes all of the control of the state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a holding storage function (special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c) for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol. Since this hold storage is an important component for maintaining the playability of this control example, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a plurality of technical configurations for storing the hold storage.

  First, the development of the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 in the time saving game state is performed based on the winning on the second winning opening 640. Second, the variation time of 10 seconds (FIG. 120 (d)) of the second special symbol in which the lottery result in the short time game is a small hit is made longer than the variation time of 3 seconds (S620) of the normal symbol. It is composition such as. By using all or a part of such a configuration, it is possible to store pending storage. In the second configuration described above, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of whether or not the short game is played, but the variation time of the normal symbol during the short game is not in the short game (( You may set shorter than normal game). However, in that case, it is necessary to set the variation time of the second special symbol where the lottery result in the time saving game is a small hit, to be longer than the normal symbol variation time in the normal game. That is, in general, in the pachinko machine, the time saving function is canceled during the jackpot game, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the fluctuation time based on the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the time-saving game after the end of the big hit game, the electric role 640a does not operate unless the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal game is up at maximum, and the game ball may enter the second winning opening It will not be possible. In the meantime, if the variation of the second special symbol is finalized and a big hit is generated via the small hit, it is not possible to store the reserved memory of the second special symbol which is the feature of this control example. Will occur. In order to solve such a problem, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are set to the above-mentioned time.

  In the contents mentioned above, the variation time of the special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the normal symbol, but the variation time of the second special symbol and the small hitting game during which the lottery result in the short time game becomes the small winning The total time of the game ball detection by the winning switch 900e4 may be set to be longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time during the normal game. This is because during the small hitting game, it is a time saving game state. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small hitting game for a predetermined period by using a configuration in which balls flowing down to the special discharge path 900 e 2 are retained in the V prize device as in this control example. In the unlikely event that the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol becomes 0 during the time saving game, the first special symbol may start to change, so the right at the third symbol display device 81 Highlighting may be performed to make a strike, or voice guidance may be performed using the voice lamp control device 113.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some jackpots and deviations, but all may be sorted into small hits. By doing so, the reserved memory of the special symbol always becomes a jackpot via the V winning device, and the speed of the game can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning hole 65a) opened when playing a big hit game and the V winning device 900 are separately provided, but both functions are V winning The device 900 may have it. In that case, during the jackpot game, the gaming ball having entered the V prize device 900 is allowed to flow down to the normal discharge flow path as shown in FIG. 113 (a) using the switching member 900h. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the number of devices, and to achieve cost reduction and space saving. Further, the normal discharge flow channel 900 e 1 and the special discharge flow channel 900 e 2 in the V prize device 900 may be used to determine whether or not to provide a time-saving game after the end of the big hit game. In this case, when the gaming ball flows down to the special discharge flow passage 900 e 2, time saving is given. In this case, the switching control of the switching member 900h may be determined in advance based on the first special symbol or the lottery of 2, or the discharge flow can be performed by moving the switching member 900h regularly at constant intervals. The road may be switched. Further, in combination with the technical configurations of the first control example to the fourth control example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to apply the positive variation.

  Further, the number of discharge flow paths in the V prize winning apparatus 900 is not limited to two, and may be three or more in accordance with the number of functions. Furthermore, the switching member for switching the discharge flow paths is not limited to the configuration of the present control example as long as the flow paths can be switched.

  In this control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V prize switch 900 e 4 is fixed to 16 rounds, but the number of rounds for the jackpot may be changed as appropriate, You may set a jackpot of no time (for example, 2 rounds). By doing so, it is possible to provide a game feature (so-called, time-short fall function) in which time saving ends without acquiring a large amount of balls. Furthermore, in this control example, the game ball is always made big hit if the game ball is made to enter the V winning device 900 that has been opened during the time saving game, but it is distributed to the small hit E (see FIG. 119C). May be provided.

  By using each of the above-described configurations, it is possible to add a pattern with few balls out and a pattern that does not become a big hit to the result of entering the V prize device 900 during time saving game, so a jackpot game is won The player can have a good time when he

  In addition, in this control example, it was decided based on the small hitting type (in the case of the big hit type) about the decision whether or not to grant the time saving game after the big hit end, for example, when you hit the big hit during the time saving game, After the end of the jackpot time is not always granted, if you hit a jackpot during non-short game, according to the current gaming state (time drop or not or not) that the time savings are always granted after the end of the jackpot Alternatively, control may be performed to determine whether or not time reduction is given after the end of the jackpot. Even with such control, it is set whether or not to give a time-saving game after a big hit, based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol.

  In addition, what is necessary is just to set appropriately about the number which can reserve and store the lottery of the second special symbol, and by changing the number of lottery reservation memories of the second special symbol and the small hitting lottery probability of the second special symbol, various games It is possible to have a sex.

<Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Hereinafter, a modification of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this modification, the number of the second special symbol lottery can be reserved and stored increased (for example, four), and the probability per second based on the second special symbol lottery reduced (for example, 1/6) pattern (FIG. This is a pattern of decreasing the value C1 corresponding to the small hitting determination value of 117 (C) and increasing the removal). In this way, there is no guarantee that the special 2 will be generated twice, but because it is possible to receive more lots of the second special symbol with a higher degree of jackpot expectation than the first special symbol, there are many depending on the lottery result It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring the consecutive villas, and to improve the interest of the game. Also, by prefetching the results of the lottery stored on hold, it is possible to provide a blissful effect for the player, such as a four-run fixed effect.

Sixth Control Example
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. FIG. In the sixth control example, when the detour path member 660 is disposed above the first variable winning device 65 and the game ball is fired to the right of the game area (right-handed), the open / close door 65f1 is closed. In some cases, the difference is that the gaming balls roll up to about 12 balls on the open / close door 65f1. Furthermore, it differs from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning prize device 65 is changed with respect to the first control example. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 154 is a perspective enlarged view in which a part of the game board 13 (a part where the detour path member 660 is disposed) is enlarged. The detour path member 660 is inserted into the opening formed in the game board 13 and is fixed to the game board 13 with a screw in a state in which the game ball can flow down to the front side of the game board 13 . The detour path member 660 is constituted by a flow path wall portion 660 a opposed in the front-rear direction of the game board 13.

  The flow path wall 660a is composed of a front side flow path wall 660a1 and a rear side flow path wall 660a2, and the front side flow path wall 660a1 and the rear side flow path wall 660a2 have a bottom surface. It is partially connected and integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portion 660a1 is disposed with three wall portions protruding rearwardly spaced by two or more game balls (in this control example, 2.5 game balls). ing. The rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three projecting wall portions on the front side, and the distance between the respective wall portions is the same as that of the front side wall portion.

  In the front side wall 660a1 and the rear side wall 660a2, the projecting wall of the front side wall 660a1 is inserted in the center between the projecting walls of the rear side wall 660a2, and further, the front side wall 660a1 and the rear side wall 660a2 It is disposed at a position where the game ball can pass through. The detour member 660 is configured to be slightly inclined downward from right to left, and the bottom surface is closed by closing the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball detours the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. The road member 660 rolls while meandering in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. Furthermore, a connecting portion 660k connecting the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 with the bottom surface connects each wall portion to the rear side wall portion 660a2 from each projecting wall of the detour passage member 660 and the front side wall portion 660a1. It is formed as. Since the connecting portion 660k protrudes slightly from the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 to form a step even when the open / close door 65f1 is closed, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 reduces the rolling speed.

  The rolling speed of the gaming ball is reduced by the connecting portion 660k, and furthermore, the gaming ball rolls by means of the detour member 660 from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13, so the gaming ball rolls over the opening / closing door 65f1. The number of rolls can be increased. In the detour path member 660 in this control example, the distance between the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 is constituted by 2.5 balls of game balls. Here, the game ball enters two balls in the front-rear direction in the first bypass channel 660c2 formed by the wall projecting from the front side wall 660a1 and the wall projecting from the rear side wall 660a2 It is comprised by the flow path. By forming five similar flow paths so as to communicate with each other, it is possible for a maximum of 12 game balls to roll in the bypass path member 660.

  As a result, when the jackpot game is started and the open / close door 65f1 is opened, the game balls flowing down on the open / close door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable winning device 65, and more The game ball of can be entered in a short time. Furthermore, although it will be described later, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, the special discharge channel 65e2 is turned by rotating the turning piece 650a every time the game ball passes the normal discharge channel 65e1 by one ball. The closing opening piece 650i is moved little by little in the direction (left direction in FIG. 155) for opening the special discharge flow path 65e2. Then, when the gaming balls pass the normal discharge flow path 65e4 by nine balls, the opening piece 650i is moved to a position at which the gaming balls can pass to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the open / close door 65f1 is opened in a state where the game ball is rolling nine or more balls on the bypass route member 660, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow down the special discharge path 65e2. Therefore, it becomes possible to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is possible to give the probability variation gaming state to the player. As a result, the player detours many game balls before the start of the jackpot so that the game balls are rolling more on the detour member 660 at the timing when the jackpot game starts. A game can be played to be launched toward 660. Therefore, even in the case of a big hit game in which the open time of the open / close door 65f1 is set to a short time, it is possible to make the player consume the game ball with a large amount of game balls. Therefore, the profit on the gaming machine side can be increased. Furthermore, even if it is a jackpot game of a short time, interest can be increased.

  Next, the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, a flow path opening device 650 is provided instead of the flow path solenoid 65k for moving the switching member 65h and the switching member 65h with respect to the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example. It is different.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the flow path opening device 650 will be described. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic view of the flow path opening device 650. FIG. The flow path opening member 650 includes an opening piece 650i for opening and closing the special discharge flow path 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the opening piece 650i, a rotating drum 650b for rotating and winding the spring wire 650h, and a rotating drum 650b. And a movable solenoid 650c for moving the regulating piece 650d for regulating the pivotal movement of the rotary drum 650b in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the open piece 650i is formed in a door shape so as to close the upstream opening of the special discharge flow passage 65e2, and is held by the first variable winning device 65 so as to be slidable to the left and right. Further, one end of a spring wire 650h is attached to one end side of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650 h is made of a stainless steel extra-fine wire, and is made up of a coil-shaped spring in the middle part. The coil spring 650h is always attached so as to bias the opening piece 650i in the direction to close the special discharge flow path 65e2. The other end of the coil spring 650h is attached to the wire attachment portion 650f of the rotating drum 650b, and the rotating wire 650h rotates in the direction of winding the spring wire 650h (right rotation direction in FIG. 156). The open piece 650i wound around the rotating drum 650b is pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

  The pivoting piece 650a is usually disposed so as to always protrude into the discharge flow passage 65e4. The pivoting piece 650a is engaged with the shaft portion of the pivoting drum 650b, and has a one-way clutch structure that pivots the pivoting drum 650b only in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. When the game ball abuts on the rotating piece 650a and the rotating piece 650a is rotated downward (see FIG. 155), the rotating drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in this control example) and the spring wire 650h. After being pivoted in the direction, the biasing force applied to the pivoting piece 650a is pivoted back to the position (the position shown in FIG. 155) before coming into contact with the game ball. When the pivoting piece 650a reverses and returns, the rotary drum 650b is configured not to pivot but only the pivoting piece 650a is pivoted. Here, as shown in FIG. 156, stopper members 650e1 to e4 protruding to the rear side (the rear side of the pachinko machine 10) are attached to the rotating drum 650b. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are respectively attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 650b every 90 degrees. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are configured to abut on the regulation piece 650d, and when the regulation piece 650d abuts on any of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the direction in which the rotating drum 650b rolls up the spring wire 650h is opposite to the winding direction Regulating rotation. On the other hand, when the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction to wind up the spring wire 650h, the restricting piece 650d abuts against the stopper members 650e1 to e4 to change in the rotating direction, and the stopper members 65e1 to e4 are on the left side of the restricting member 650d. With the stopper members e1 to e4 positioned on the left side, the rotation in the direction opposite to the winding direction of the wire is restricted in a state where it is allowed to be positioned (see FIG. 156).

  Thus, when the game ball having flowed down the normal discharge flow path 65e4 rotates the rotation piece 650a and the rotation drum 650b is rotated 90 degrees by the rotation piece 650a, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are restriction members. The rotation drum 650 h is held at the rotated position by being regulated at the rotation position by 650 d. The same operation is repeated as the next game ball normally flows down the discharge flow path 65e4, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In this control example, the movable solenoid 650c is also excited at the timing when the open / close door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, and the restricting member 650d is moved to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction away from the stopper members 650e1 to e4). As a result, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to e4 and the restriction member 650d is released, the rotary drum 650d is rotated in the opposite direction to the winding direction by the biasing force of the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is in the closed position. It slides and is moved.

  Therefore, in the first variable winning device 65 in the present control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to apply a definite variation based on the number of gaming balls entered in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, even after the jackpot game is started, the player can play the game with an interest in whether the probability change game is given. In addition, it is possible to vary the grant ratio of the probability variation game by the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the pivoting piece 650a is disposed in the normal discharge flow path 65e4, but the invention is not limited thereto. The pivoting piece 650a is disposed at the position of the specific winning opening 65a1 of the first variable winning device 65, and the entering game ball is immediately The opening piece 650i may be configured to move. With such a configuration, at the timing when the tenth game ball enters the ball, the open piece 650i is in the open state, and can be configured to easily flow down the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, it can be configured such that a positive change is surely given by 10 more balls entering.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the open pieces 650i are configured to be in the open state by winning nine, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured by another number. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the game ball rotates the sprocket by winning on the first variable winning device 65, and in the 10th game ball, the winning opening provided on the sprocket can win It may be configured to face any position.

<On the seventh control example>
The seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 170. FIG. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that continuous chance effects described later, which are not included in the first control example described above, are executed. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  First, continuous chance presentation will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, unlike the first control example, with regard to the variation order of the special symbol, the gaming ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is changed in the order in which the holding balls are stored. Are configured to FIG. 157 (a) is a view showing a maximum of eight holding balls combining the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selected for each holding ball The type is indicated by a symbol. In the seventh control example, the type of fluctuation pattern to be selected (short out, long out, reach, super reach, or special reach) can be determined in prefetch processing 2 (FIG. 166, S450). It is done.

  In an example in which the holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a) is stored, six holding balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth holding ball is stored. In this case, it is shown that continuous chance effect is set by the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 described later. Although details will be described later, whether or not to execute the continuous chance effect by lottery when the prize information command transmitted when the holding ball is generated from the main controller 110 is the super reach or the special reach Determination is made. If it is determined to execute the continuous chance presentation, the number of times to execute the continuous chance presentation is determined within the range of the holding ball that has already been stored. This number is determined by the number including the holding ball determined to execute the continuous chance (in this example, the sixth holding ball). For example, if the number of holding balls is six as shown in FIG. 157 (a), it is determined by lottery at a maximum of six times.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 158 (a) to FIG. 159 (a), an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance effect will be described. In FIG. 158 (a), the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command for the sixth holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), and the continuous chance effect is produced from the variation display of the special symbol for the first holding ball. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol in, when execution of is set.

  In the effect in which the execution of the continuous chan effect is set, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the effect that the symbol shakes is executed while the special symbol is still stopped at the previous variation display. After that, as a background image, the characters "continuous chance !!" are displayed simultaneously with the change of the special symbol. Here, the symbols “ha” indicated by five “black circles” displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicate the number of currently stored holding balls. Here, the holding symbol ha1 is the second holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), the holding symbol ha2 is the third holding ball, the holding symbol ha3 is the holding ball fourth, and the holding symbol ha4 is the holding. The fifth ball and the holding symbol ha5 correspond to the sixth holding ball.

  In (b) of FIG. 158, the variation time in the variation of the special symbol shown in (a) of FIG. 158 (variation corresponding to the first holding ball shown in (a) of FIG. 157) elapses, and the special symbol stops The display mode at the time of displaying is shown. In this continuous chance presentation, when a change to the next holding ball is also set to continuous chance presentation, a combination of a specific main symbol called a chance eye in the previous continuous chance presentation (in this control example, “341 Is configured to be displayed. In addition, the chance eye is set with a symbol different from the symbol showing the big hit (displayed with the same eye), and it is informed that it is a loss. By displaying this chance, not only the player can recognize that the lottery result is out of the game, but also can recognize that continuous chance presentation is continuously executed for the next change. And the character of "continuous chance production !!" displayed on the background image is continuously displayed even when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and is displayed across the start of the variation of the next special symbol.

  FIG. 159 (a) is an example of the variation display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the retention symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158 (a) and (b)) which is the variation of the second retention as shown in FIG. 157 (a) FIG. In FIG. 159 (a), the holding symbol ha2 is a holding ball (the second holding ball in FIG. 157 (a)) from which the variation pattern of super reach is selected as shown in FIG. 157 (a), The display mode is shown when the reach state is reached after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change. Here, since the judgment result of the change is out of order, as in the combination of the special symbol shown in FIG.

  Here, returning to FIG. 157 (a), the latent effect in the continuous chance effect will be described. As already described above, the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth holding ball, and the execution of the continuous chance effect from the first holding ball is determined. In this case, based on the first to fifth pieces of winning ball information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is determined whether a holding ball serving as a super reach or a special reach is stored. In the case where the holding ball which becomes super reach or special reach is stored as in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second holding ball is super reach), continuous chance presentation ends once with the holding ball Perform settings to make it appear as you did, and one or more consecutive holding balls among the subsequent holding balls (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball) Is set for the holding ball that executes the latent effect with respect to.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the latent effect is an effect displayed so as to shake in a state in which the symbol of the stop state of the previous special symbol is stopped at the start of the variation of the special symbol as shown in FIG. . Similarly, at the start of the continuous chance effect, after the stop symbol is shaken and displayed, a display indicating that it is the continuous chance effect at the same time as the change is displayed, but in this latent effect, the stop symbol is displayed with shaking After that, even if the change is started, the background display indicating that it is continuous chance presentation is not displayed. By configuring the latent effect in this manner, the player can have an expectation that the continuous chance effect will be started by displaying the stop symbol with shaking. In addition, the same effect as this latent effect is configured so that it may be selected and executed even when the change of the ordinary special symbol is made, even when the execution of the continuous chance effect is not determined. Therefore, it is also recognized by the player that the continuous chance effect is not necessarily executed in the special symbol corresponding to the subsequent suspension even if the latent effect is displayed, and the continuous effect is produced by the latent effect. Can play games in anticipation of the execution of the game.

  In FIG. 157 (a), of the third to fifth holding balls, the fifth holding ball is obtained by the processing of S1726 of the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The execution of the latent effect is determined (assumed to be determined) up to (the third to fifth holding balls). Thereby, in the variation of the special symbol with respect to the third to fifth holding balls, the latent effect shown in FIG. 159 (b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, with the second holding ball, the player loses the final fluctuation in the continuous chance production, but may not start the continuous chance production again, or, in fact, the continuous chance production is hidden. You can have the expectation that you are continuing just by Then, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), in the variation of the special symbol of the sixth holding ball, the continuous chance presentation will be executed again.

  In this control example, although the latent effect is executed several times continuously, there is no guarantee that the continuous chance effect will be subsequently executed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the latent effect has been continued three times or more In the case, the continuous chance presentation may be executed after that. By configuring in this manner, the player can be made interested in the continuous number of times when the latent effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest can be further improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 157 (b), the number of holding balls that are established after the holding ball that triggered the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined, and the number of holding balls is made the largest. The case of setting the execution of the latent effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), the six holding balls are established, and the winning information command is output when the sixth holding is established. It shows the case where execution is decided. In FIG. 157 (c), digestion of the holding ball proceeds from the state of FIG. 157 (b), and the third holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (b) is shifted to the first holding ball. It is in the state shown. In this state, at the timing when the first holding ball (the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (c)) starts changing, the holding ball for which the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined (FIG. 157 (c In), the number of times of execution of the latent effect is determined, with the number of holding balls established after the fourth holding ball) being the largest. Here, the latent effect is executed at the number of consecutive times in which the above-described latent effect is determined with respect to the fluctuation of the holding ball after the fluctuation of the fourth holding ball is finished.

  As a result, even after the final change (the change of the special symbol with respect to the fourth holding ball in the present control example) in the continuous chance effect is completed, the player continues the continuous chance effect because the latent effect is executed. You can expect it to be. Furthermore, since the latent effect is configured to be executed within the range of the holding ball established at the start of the first consecutive chance presentation, the super reach or special reach It can be expected that the change is stored and continuous chance presentation or latency presentation is being performed.

  Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the super reach or special reach to the holding ball established at the start fluctuation of the continuous chance presentation (the holding ball stored after the holding ball of the final fluctuation of the continuous chance presentation) If there is a hold ball before the change is set to execute the latent effect, and by performing the continuous chance effect again by the change of the super reach or the special reach, the player can be made more hidden. It is possible to increase the expectation of continuous chance presentation when displayed. Further, in this case, it is also possible to configure continuous chance presentation with the holding ball stored prior to the holding ball which becomes the special reach or the super reach.

  In addition, about continuous chance production, although it was constituted so that a notice mode might be displayed by the background in this control example, not only it but a specific character may be displayed, and the color of the background is usual. The color may be changed to a different color, or the type of BGM or a special sound effect may be output. Furthermore, the chance eyes displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be other combinations, and are not displayed as normal symbols, for example, they are variably displayed as the symbol of "continuation" It may be configured to be displayed as a symbol of a character or the like, and a special mode of dislodging (big hit (with It may be configured to be displayed in a mode different from the display of.

  Next, an electrical configuration in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. Only differences from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 are The difference is that it has been changed. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202a in the present control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to (c), and first, referring to FIG. 160, the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of 113 will be described. FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous chance number table 222 d and a latency number table 222 e are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The continuous opportunity number table 222d in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. The continuous chance number table 222d is different from the continuous chance number table 202d (see FIG. 162A) for winning referred to when the received win information command indicates a win determination result and the win determination result is out. It is configured by the out-going continuous opportunity number table 222d (see FIG. 162 (b)) referred to in a certain case. The continuous chance number table 222d is a data table for determining execution and non-execution of the continuous chance presentation, and in the case of execution, determining the number.

  FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic view that schematically shows the contents of the winning successive opportunity number table 222d. In this hit continuous chance number table 222d, the current chance ball number is not executed for each current hold number, and the current hold number is set as the maximum value, and the number decision counter 223n (0-198) to be described later. Judgment values for) are set respectively. In the state where one holding ball number is stored, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), a value of “0 to 160” is set as the determination value of the determination content for which the continuous chance effect is not executed. The judgment value of "161 to 198" is set as the judgment value of one continuous chance presentation. Here, based on the value of the acquired number determination counter 223 n, the determination content set to the coincident determination value is selected by collating with the determination value of the consecutive opportunity number table 222 d. Here, if non-execution is selected, continuous chance presentation is not performed. In addition, when the number of times of continuous chance presentation of one time is determined, the continuous chance presentation is set for the execution of the first holding ball. Note that the number of executions set in the continuous chance number table 222d is the holding ball that triggered the execution of the continuous chance effect (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the sixth holding ball) Indicates the number of previously stored pending balls. For example, when the lottery for continuous chance effect is performed on the sixth holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a) and the number of execution times of four times is selected by the table of consecutive opportunity times 222d, three Continuous chance production is started from the holding ball of the eye, and continuous chance production is executed continuously to the sixth holding ball.

  Similarly, the judgment value to be referred to is set from the continuous opportunity number table 222d according to the number of holding balls when the winning information command is received. In this control example, the continuous chance effect is set to be performed more easily as the number of balls held is larger when the winning command is received. Further, as apparent from comparison with the consecutive chance number table 222d for disconnection shown in FIG. 162 (b), continuous chance effect is produced for all the number of holding balls when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit. The probability of being executed is set high. In this way, execution of the continuous chance effect is set to be easy to set for the prize information command indicating the super reach or the special reach, which is the success or failure judgment result. Furthermore, as the number of balls held increases, the continuous chance effect is determined more easily, so continuous chance effects are more easily executed against the fluctuation with respect to more continuous balls held, and the player is also prevented from the out-of-order fluctuation. Can play a game with high expectation to the jackpot.

  In addition, as shown in the continuous chance frequency table 222d for out-of-focus, even when the number of balls held is 6 or more, when the result of the pass / fail judgment is out, a maximum of 6 consecutive chance effects are produced. The judgment value is set. As a result, when the sixth consecutive chance presentation is started, the player can recognize early that the success / failure determination result is a big hit by continuing the continuous chance presentation one more time. Therefore, it is possible to give interest to the number of continuous chance effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the number-of-latents lottery table 222e in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the number-of-latents lottery table 222e. When the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the above-mentioned continuous chance frequency table 222d, the number-of-retitions lottery table 222e, among the holding balls corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effects, is a lottery opportunity of the continuous chance effect It becomes the super reach or the special reach judging whether the holding ball which becomes the super reach or the special reach is memorized by the other holding balls except the reserved ball which became the (the reach reach the super reach or the special reach) When a holding ball is stored, it is a lottery table for determining the number of times to execute the latent effect with the holding ball up to the holding ball which is the drawing opportunity of the continuous ball effect and the holding ball when the holding ball is stored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the sixth holding ball is established, the six consecutive execution chance effects are determined, and the first to sixth holding balls continue the continuous chance It is determined that the presentation is to be performed. Therefore, if it is determined whether the first to fifth holding balls have a super reach or special reach holding ball, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the second holding ball is a super reach or a special reach. Since it becomes a holding ball which becomes, it becomes possible to execute up to 3 times of latent effects for the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball. Here, with reference to the number-of-latents lottery table 222e, table contents to be selected are respectively set for the determination results of the sixth holding ball, and the number of latencies described later for each maximum number of latencies A determination value corresponding to the determination counter 223o is set. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), when it is determined that the acceptance result of the sixth holding ball is a hit, among the table contents of the hit, the determination value of which the maximum number of times of latency is 3 is referred to. Here, if the value of the obtained latency number determination counter 223o is "0 to 50", the number of latency times is once, if it is "51 to 149", the number of latency times twice, if "150 to 198", the number of latency times 3 The times are set. Here, when the number of latencies twice is determined, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), the third and fourth holding balls do not execute the continuous chance effects, and the above-described latencies are performed. Be done. Continuous chance production is started again with the 5th holding ball, and it is continuously executed until the 6th holding ball. The number of latent effects after the continuous chance effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) is similarly determined by the number-of-retitions lottery table 222e. In the example of holding balls (corresponding to the fourth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (c), five pieces in the example of FIG. If there is no holding ball to be a super reach or a special reach in the first to seventh holding balls), the table contents corresponding to the omission of the number-of-latents lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) are referred to.

  In the number-of-retitions lottery table 222e, as shown in FIG. 163, when the result of determination of acceptance is out, the maximum number of latent effects is limited to 3 times regardless of the number of holding balls that can be made latent There is. As a result, when the third latent effect is executed, the player can recognize that when the latent effect is executed with the next holding ball, the player will win a jackpot in the subsequent continuous chance effect. Therefore, the player can have an interest also in the number of consecutive times of the latent effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a count determination counter 223 n, a latency count determination counter 223 o, and a continuous chance storage area 223 p are respectively added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The number determination counter 223 n is a counter for determining the number of execution, non-execution and execution of continuous chance presentation. The number determination counter 223 n is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 adds one to each predetermined cycle and updates the same. The effect counter 223f and the number-of-latents determination counter 223o, which will be described later, are set to have different update cycles, and are not synchronized. The number determination counter 223 n is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The number-of-latents determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times to execute the latent effects in the continuous chance effect from the number-of-latents lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). This latency number determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly incremented and updated one by one in the range of 0 to 198 and is updated at predetermined intervals by the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. 1 is added and updated. The number-of-latents determination counter 223o is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the content of the effect to be performed on each holding ball when the continuous chance effect is performed. The continuous chance storage area 223p is composed of a storage area corresponding to eight holding balls and one execution area. When continuous chance presentation is determined, data indicating the determined presentation content is stored in the area of the corresponding holding ball, and is shifted to the area corresponding to the immediately preceding holding ball as the holding ball is consumed. Holding balls that start to move are shifted to the execution area. Thereby, continuous chance presentation can be executed reliably.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up at the time of power interruption, and is restored to the state at power interruption when the power is turned on again. Therefore, even when a power failure occurs, continuous chance presentation can be performed continuously.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the variation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 161 (a)), the disconnection (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 161 (b)), and the disconnection (general). The probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161 (c)) is at least defined. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the fluctuation pattern table etc. in time saving game state etc. are set besides this.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is the variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “51 to 179” is the variety of special reach (90 seconds) for the variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds). For the fluctuation pattern of), "180 to 198" are respectively set as the determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern for which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired is set as a big hit It is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the (normal) deviation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection. The off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set.

  Here, if the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, a relatively short variation (7 seconds) of variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) of variation time are set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  In addition, for outreach, “0 to 149” for various outreach normal reach (30 seconds), “150 to 197” for outfall super reach (60 seconds), outlier special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 determines the type of stop, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for removal Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 161C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-order (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. The disconnection (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol to be detached when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 in the value of the set fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  In this control example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is configured to acquire the timing fluctuation type counter CS1 in which the game ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to determine the start of fluctuation before the start of fluctuation until the fluctuation type selected at the time of winning. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and as shown in the first control example, also in the case where the fluctuation type selected by the number of holding balls at the start of fluctuation is different, the fluctuation type assigned to super reach etc. The variation type can be determined at the time of winning by assigning the value of the counter CS1 constant even when the number of balls held is changed.

<About control processing of main controller 110 in seventh control example>
Next, control processing to be executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the seventh control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is a special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) for the first control example. The difference is that the start entry process (FIG. 66, S105) is changed to the start winning process (FIG. 165, S105). The other processing is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example is the process from S203 to S204, S208 to S209 with respect to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed to the processing of. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is being stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is performed. In the process of S250, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are referenced to determine whether a holding ball having a holding order of 1 is stored (S251). Although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, when winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation of the special symbol is configured to be started in the winning order combining the both. There is. In addition, the maximum number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four as in the first control example. When the holding ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, and in that case, information indicating the winning order is stored. In the winning order, an order obtained by adding 1 to the sum of the winning numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, the winning sequence is also decremented by one and updated, based on the holding ball being digested by one ball (variation start).

  In the processing of S251, it is determined whether or not the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning opening 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the reserved area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order to be started to change next Ru. If it is determined that the order to start the next change is the second special symbol by the process of S251 (S251: Yes), the process of S205 is executed. The processes of S205 to S207 are the same as in the first control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S251, if it is determined that the order of starting to change next is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether the order to start changing next is the first special symbol (S252). Next, when it is determined that the winning order to start changing is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is performed. The processes of S210 to S212 are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S252 that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, the holding ball is not stored (S252: No), this process is ended. The other processing is omitted for the first control example.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 165) in the seventh control example is different from the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 66) in the first control example with S406 in S420 and S412 in S430. The difference is that the prefetching process (S413) is changed to prefetching process 2 (S450). The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the processing of S420 and S430, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the sum of the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is The difference is that the information is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b as information of the winning order. By configuring in this manner, in this control example, when winning, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired, and the variation type (short out, length selected in the prefetch processing 2 (FIG. 166, S450) described later It is configured to be able to determine out of the range, normal reach, super reach, or special reach, and notify the sound lamp control device 113 as a prize information command.

  If it is determined No in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is executed, the prefetch process 2 is executed (S450). After the prefetch process 2 (S450) is performed, this process ends.

  The prefetch process 2 (S450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of this pre-reading process 2 (S450). The prefetch process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) in the seventh control example is different from the prefetch process (FIG. 67, S413) in the first control example in that the process of S510 is added. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S503 or S504 is performed, the process of S510 is performed. In the process of S510, the fluctuation pattern is based on the lottery result (judgment determination) based on the winning information (each counter value) acquired in S503 or S504, the acquired stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation type to be selected is determined from the selection table 202d (S510). After that, a winning information command indicating the jackpot determination result and the variation type determined in S510 is set.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected variation type also by the winning information command. Therefore, in the present control example, it is possible to execute the continuous chance effect which is a special effect across a plurality of fluctuations triggered by the storage of a holding ball for which a specific fluctuation pattern is executed by the voice lamp control device 113. . In the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 pre-reads and determines the change type, but the present invention is not limited to this. A winning information command indicating information on each acquired counter value is set, and the sound lamp control unit 113 is used. Each type of data that can be determined may be set to determine the type of fluctuation or the like.

<About control processing by the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example>
The control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh control example, with respect to the first control example, the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) changes to the command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) and the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S1512) changes. The difference is that the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) is changed. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1540). Command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) in the first control example in that processes of S1650 to S1651 are added. . The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S1609 that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), the process of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1650). When the winning information command is received (S1650: Yes), the winning information processing is executed (S1651). After executing the winning information processing, the processing of S1619 is executed.

  Here, the details of the winning information processing (S1651) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning information processing (S1651). In the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not continuous chance presentation is being set (S1721). If it is determined that the continuous chance effect is set to determine whether or not the information regarding the continuous chance effect is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1721: Yes) End this process. As described above, since a new continuous chance effect is not set while the continuous chance effect is set, it is possible to suppress a defect such as an effect being overwritten during execution of the continuous chance effect. .

  If it is determined in the process of S1721 that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received prize information command is a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722) . If the received prize information command is not a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1722 that the received prize information command is a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the number determination counter 223n and the number of latencies determination counter 223o It acquires (S1724).

  Based on the acquired number-of-times determination counter 223n, the received winning information command, and the current number of holding balls (number of holding balls corresponding to the received winning information command), the consecutive chance number table 222d (FIGS. 162A to 162B). (Refer to) Acquire (determine) information (execution count or non-execution) related to the execution of continuous chance rendition. It is determined whether the information acquired in S1724 is the number of times of execution of the continuous chance effect, that is, whether it is the execution of the continuous chance effect (S1725). If the execution of the continuous chance presentation has not been determined (S1725: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1726 that execution of the continuous chance effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the holding ball corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effects becomes super reach or special reach It is determined from the winning information storage area 223a whether a holding ball (excluding the holding ball that has received the winning information command (the holding ball that is the final change of the continuous chance effect) is stored) (S1726). Although illustration is omitted, similarly to the first control example, when the prize information command is received, data corresponding to the information indicated by the prize information command received is stored in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the holding ball. Be done. Incidentally, as the holding balls are digested, the data is shifted to the area of the corresponding holding ball, and the data of the winning information corresponding to the next holding ball is overwritten when the fluctuation starts.

  If it is determined in the process of S1726 that the holding ball to be the super reach or the special reach is not stored, the process of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1726 that there is a holding ball which becomes super reach or special reach (S1726: Yes), the process of S1726 showing the result of the pass / fail judgment indicated by the winning information command received from the number of times drawing table 222e In the process of S1723 and the number of possible latencies, which is the number of holding balls up to the holding ball stored immediately before the holding ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the holding ball which becomes the super reach or special reach determined in The number of times of incubation is determined from the value of the acquired number-of-times-of-intentions determination counter 223o (S1727). Then, based on the content of the determined continuous chance effect, the effect to be executed on each holding ball is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p for each holding ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, storage areas are set respectively corresponding to the eight holding balls, and for each holding ball, start of continuous chance effects, end of continuous chance effects, latent effects, continuous Data is stored that can identify re-entry and the like of the chance presentation (S1728). Each data stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is shifted to an area corresponding to the holding ball corresponding to each time the holding ball is digested. When the continuous chance effect is finished, all the stored data is cleared, so it can be judged whether the continuous chance effect is set depending on whether or not the data is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p. When the process of S1728 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, a later latency setting process (S1750) is added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. It differs in the point. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S1709 is executed, a post-latency setting process is executed (S1750). The post-latency setting process (S1750) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing the contents of this post-latency setting process (S1750).

  In the post-latency setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), it is first determined based on data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p whether it is the start change of the continuous chance effect (S1751). Here, it is determined whether the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the holding ball that starts changing is data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

  When it is determined in the process of S175 that the start fluctuation of the continuous chance effect is not determined (S175: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start fluctuation of the continuous chance effect (S1751: Yes), information on the current holding ball is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a (S1752). With regard to the information on the acquired holding balls, it is determined whether a holding ball serving as a super reach or a special reach is stored with respect to the holding balls stored after the final change of the continuous chance presentation (S1753). If it is determined that the holding ball serving as the super reach or the special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), the holding ball stored next to the holding ball corresponding to the final change of the continuous chance presentation is super The number of holdings up to the holding ball stored up to one before the holding ball which is the reach or special reach is determined as the maximum value (the number of possible latent times) (S1754). The value of the number-of-latents determination counter 223o is acquired and the number of latencies is obtained from the number-of-latents lottery table 222e based on the value, the determination result of holding balls becoming super reach or special reach, and the number of possible latencies determined in S1754. (S1755). Based on the number of latencies determined in S1755, the continuous chance presentation is determined. Here, from the holding ball stored after the number of holding balls for the number of times of hiding to the holding ball to be the super reach or the special reach is set as a holding ball for executing continuous chance presentation. After the process of S1756, the process of S1758 is performed.

  If it is determined in the process of S175 that there is no holding ball to be a super reach or a special reach (S1753: No), the value of the number-of-latents determination counter 223o is acquired and stored after the final fluctuation of the value and the continuous chance effect The number of latencies is determined from the number-of-latents lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) based on the number of latencies possible, which is the number of holding balls (S1757). Thereafter, the process of S1758 is performed. In the process of S1757, the number of latencies is determined based on the data for which the result of determination of acceptance is out.

  In the process of S1758, the continuous chance storage area 223p is set based on the information on the continuous chance effect and the latent effect determined in the process of S1755 to S1756 and S1757 (S1758). Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, even at the start of the continuous chance effect, the latent effect and the new continuous chance effect are set with respect to the holding ball that has been established after the determination and the start, so the player can make various continuous chances. I can enjoy the production. Further, the continuous chance effect is an effect to be performed on the fluctuation display of a plurality of continuous holding balls by prefetching the determination result of the established holding balls. As a result, when continuous chance rendition is started, the player holds a holding ball as a super reach or a special reach among holding balls established at that time, and the lottery result is not a hit. Have an expectation of Here, in the present control example, since the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the holding ball established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, the player is made to have expectations for many holding balls. be able to. Therefore, expectation can be sustained and given also to the latent effect for the holding ball after the end of the continuous chance effect.

  In this control example, the latent effect is an effect of shaking the symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute display of a sound effect or a character at the start of a change or the like. In addition, the pattern of the special symbol or the like may be changed to a pattern different from a normal one and displayed.

<Eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 177, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a signal to be output to the external output terminal plate 261 is changed according to the jackpot type.

  Specifically, in the present control example, the external output terminal plate 261 has a character continuous operating terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the character continuous operating device, and a jackpot 1 terminal for indicating a jackpot state or type. Is provided.

  And, when the big hit based on the big hit F (16R probability variation lottery presence · time short present big hit) is executed, at the time when the big hit game is started, the big hit 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off, When the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to be turned on. On the other hand, when the jackpot based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery no / time short jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the jackpot game is started In addition, when the jackpot based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery no / time short hit) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to remain off. Furthermore, regardless of these jackpot types, when a jackpot game is executed, control is performed so that the feature continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the big hit is made by comparing the timing when each of the signal of the character continuous working terminal and the signal of the big hit 1 terminal is turned on. The type can be determined. As a result, the jackpot type can be determined in the hall computer 262 without providing the terminals of the external output terminal board 261 for each jackpot type (jacks F, G, H), and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Can.

  Although the present control example has the above-described configuration added to the first control example, the present control example is not limited to this, and may be added to each of the above-described control examples. In the following description, points different from the first control example will be described. The same parts as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the eighth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic view schematically showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 is provided with the external output terminal plate 261. Since the other points are the same, the detailed description about the same part is omitted.

  An external output terminal plate 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 in the present control example. The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with at least a character continuous operating terminal, one large-contact terminal and two large-contact terminals.

  The bonus continuous operating terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not the continuous bonus operating device is operated and a period in which the open / close door 65f1 is opened or closed, that is, a period in which a big hit game is being performed. If the bonus continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates a period in which the open / close door 65f1 is opened or closed, that is, a period in which a jackpot game is executed, and if it is off, the other period (jackpot game) Period is not executed). In the external output process executed in the main process of the main control unit 110, the bonus item continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined that the big hit game has been started (see S7002 in FIG. 177), and in the process If it is determined that the jackpot game is ended, it is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being played, and if it is ON, it indicates that a jackpot game is being played, and if it is OFF, it indicates that a jackpot game is not being played. However, unlike the above-mentioned bonus continuous work terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery presence / time short presence jackpot), the gaming ball to the probability variation switch 65e3 Is set to on when the vehicle passes.

  Specifically, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main processing of the main control unit 110 (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), and the jackpot pertaining to the jackpot game If it is determined that the type is a jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: Yes), the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and in the process, it is determined that a jackpot game is in progress. If it is determined (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is the jackpot F (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), it is further determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is on. In the case (S7005 of FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7004 of FIG. 177). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S7001 in FIG. 177: No), the game is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal indicating whether the gaming machine is in a state advantageous to the player, the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, or the time saving gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is on. In some cases, it indicates that it is in an advantageous state for the above-mentioned player, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not. However, as with the jackpot 1 terminal mentioned above, it is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery presence / time short presence jackpot), and is set to ON when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 It is

  Specifically, the jackpot 2 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main processing of the main control unit 110 (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), and the jackpot pertaining to the jackpot game If it is determined that the type is jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: Yes), jacks 2 terminals are set to ON (S7004 in FIG. 177). Further, in the processing, if it is determined that a jackpot game is in progress (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), and the jackpot type relating to the jackpot game is a jackpot F (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), If it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, if it is determined that the probability change state or the time saving state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has ended (S7008 in FIG. 177: No), it is set to OFF (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, a prize ball terminal etc.), and signals output from the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 215 of the payout control unit 111 are It is possible to receive. The other terminals are configured such that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262, and are already known, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and a first hit type selection table 202f for selecting the jackpot type for the first control example described above. The point is that they are newly provided. Since the other points are the same, the detailed description of the same part is omitted.

  In this control example, unlike the first control example described above, a jackpot F, a jackpot G, and a jackpot H are provided as jackpot types. As these jackpot types, a first jackpot selection table 202f (see FIG. 172 (b)) set so that jackpot F and jackpot G jackpot H can be selected, and a first jackpot counter value C2 And selected based on

  Details of the first hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first contact type selection table 202f and the first contact type counter value C2. In the first hit type selection table 202f, the value "0 to 33" of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the determination value of the big hit F, "34 to 66" as the determination value of the big hit G, and the determination value of the big hit H “67 to 99” is set. In the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) executed in the timer interrupt process of main controller 110, while obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 65), the first hit type selection table 202f and The jackpot type is selected based on the first hit type counter value C2. The jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot type selected here.

  In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery existence · time short possession jackpot), the passage solenoid 65k is activated in the jackpot game, and the game ball entered in the specific winning opening 65a becomes a jackpot which can pass to the probability change switch 65e3 ing. Based on the passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, a probability change game is awarded after the end of the jackpot game. In the big hit game based on the big hit G (16R probability variation lottery no ・ time short existence big hit), the passage solenoid 65k does not operate in the big hit game, the game ball which entered the specified winning opening 65a enters the probability change switch 65e3 It has not been a big hit. After the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, time saving game will be awarded. Furthermore, in the big hit game based on the big hit H (16 R probability variation lottery no ・ time short non hit), the game ball which entered the specified winning a prize opening 65a does not enter the probability variation switch 65 e3 like the big hit G mentioned above It is. In addition, after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit H, time saving game is not granted, it will shift to the normal gaming state.

  Furthermore, the jackpot type selected here is referred to when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot at the time of fluctuation stop (S216 in FIG. 176: Yes) in the special symbol fluctuation processing of the main controller 110, and the jackpot type An open scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on (see S217 in FIG. 176), stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176), and referred to in external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later. Will be

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 in the present control example is different in that a big hit type storage area 203α is provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above. Since the other points are the same, the detailed description about the same part is omitted.

  The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining a jackpot type related to a jackpot game being executed, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H) is stored. The jackpot type storage area 203α is set when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 176) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (( See S260 in FIG. 176).

  Then, when it is determined in the external output processing executed in the main processing of main controller 110 that the jackpot type is jackpot F and is not jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), the probability change setting flag 203h Is ON (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), the output of the V prize terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, one jackpot and one jackpot is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process that the jackpot type is the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 176: Yes), the outputs to the jacks 1 and jacks 2 are set to ON (FIG. 177). See S7004). When the jackpot type is the jackpot H, as in the case where the jackpot type is the jackpot F, it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: No). However, in the big hit game based on the big hit H, the game ball does not pass the probability variation winning switch 65e3 and the probability variation setting flag 203h is never turned on (S7005 in FIG. 177: No), one jack and jackpot The two terminals are never set to on.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the output of the character continuous actuation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 with the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, it can be determined that the jackpot G is on when both the character continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, while the character continuous operation terminal is turned on at the jackpot start If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that the jackpot F or jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V winning (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game If it is, it can be determined that the jackpot F, while it is determined that it is a jackpot H if there is no V prize (pass of the gaming ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal does not turn on. it can. In addition, you may be comprised so that the jackpot classification of a jackpot game may be discriminate | determined by comparing a bonus item continuous operation terminal and a jackpot 2 terminal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing the gaming state of the gaming machine, the passing state of the gaming ball of the probability change switch 65 e 3, and the state of the signals of the respective terminals of the external output terminal board 261.

  In FIG. 174 (a), when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the bonus continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, and the passing state of the gaming ball of the probability change switch 65e3. 6 is a timing chart showing the outputs of one jack and two jacks of the external output terminal plate 261. FIG.

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the bonus item continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are in the OFF state. Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G of the gaming state of the gaming machine is started, the feature continuous operation terminal, jack 1 jack and jack 2 jack are set to ON in the external output process (see FIG. 177) described later. . Thereafter, when the big hit game based on the big hit G ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the time saving state, and the output of the bonus continuous operating terminal and the big hit 1 terminal is set to off in the external output processing described later. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). Then, when the time saving game is finished, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, referring to FIG. 174 (b), when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the bonus continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the probability change switch 65e3 FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing the passage state of the gaming ball, and the outputs of the large hit 1 terminal and the large hit 2 terminals of the external output terminal board 261. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the jackpot 1 jack and jackpot 2 jack outputs are turned on when the jackpot game is started, as compared to the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above. The difference is that the signals of jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminals are set to ON at the time the gaming ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during jackpot game (when the V prize is won).

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the feature continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are in the OFF state. Then, when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the big hit gaming state based on the big hit F, the output to the bonus continuous actuation terminal is set to ON in the external output processing described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, during the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminals of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON based on the passage of the gaming ball through the probability change switch 65e3 (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Thereafter, as in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the jackpot game is ended and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability variation given after the jackpot game is over When the game is over, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to OFF (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

  When the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed, when the state of the gaming machine changes to the jackpot gaming state, the output of the bonus continuous actuation terminal is turned on, while the gaming ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3. Because there is no, the outputs of the jack 1 jack and jack 2 will remain off. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the bonus continuous actuation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In jackpot H, neither jackpot 1 terminal nor jackpot 2 terminal is set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)), since neither jackal nor jackpot terminals are awarded after the execution of the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described. FIG. 175 shows the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the character continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the passing state of the gaming ball of the probability change switch 65e3, and the external output when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the outputs of one jack and two jacks of the terminal plate 261. FIG.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a timing chart in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175 (b) is the jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, jackpot F It is a timing chart in, when a game is performed continuously.

  First, with reference to FIG. 175 (a), the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described. In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the bonus product continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are all set to off. After that, when the lottery result becomes the big hit of the big hit G, and the big hit game based on the big hit G is started, the outputs of the feature continuous operating terminal, the big hit 1 terminal and the big hit 2 terminals are all set on (FIG. See S7002 and S7004). Thereafter, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, time saving game is given, and the character continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game is over After that, since the time saving game is given and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the time saving game state, the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to off, and the signal of on is continuously output.

  And during the time saving game, when the jackpot of the jackpot becomes a big hit again and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the bonus character continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminals are also continued It will be set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Thereafter, when the jackpot game to be executed again is finished, a time saving game is given, and the character continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot 2 terminals are It is not set to off, and an on signal is output continuously. Then, when the time saving game ends, the game proceeds to the normal gaming state and the output of the jack 2 terminal is set to OFF (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175 (b), a case will be described in which jackpot games based on jackpot types are successively executed in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, jackpot F. In the normal gaming state, outputs of the bonus continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to off. Thereafter, when the lottery result is a big hit of the big hit H, and a big hit game based on the big hit H is executed (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), the output of the bonus continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177). Reference), on the other hand, the outputs of the jacks 1 and jacks 2 are not set on and remain off (S7005 in FIG. 177: No). Then, when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the bonus continuous actuation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In jackpot H, neither jackpot 1 terminal nor jackpot 2 terminal is set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)), since neither jackal nor jackpot terminals are awarded after the execution of the jackpot game.

  After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot G and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes, S7003: Yes), the output to the bonus product continuous operation terminal, jack 1 jack and jack 2 It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, time saving game is given, and the output to the bonus continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is the short time gaming state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to off, and the output remains on. After that, during the time saving game, when the jackpot F becomes a jackpot and the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the character continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the jackpot 2 terminals continue. Will be set to on.

  Then, when the gaming ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 during the big hit game, the output of the big hit 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability changing game is given after the big hit game is over. When the jackpot game is over, the output to the character continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (S7007 in FIG. 177), while the probability change game is given after the end of the jackpot game, to jack 2 jacks Output is not turned off and remains on. After that, when the odd change game ends, the game shifts to the normal game, and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is set to off.

  As described above, in the present control example, the output timings of the accessory continuous actuation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal are configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the type of the jackpot game by comparing the output timings of the bonus character continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. Specifically, it can be determined that the jackpot G is on when both the character continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, while the character continuous operation terminal is turned on at the jackpot start If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that the jackpot F or jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V winning (passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game If it is, it can be determined that the jackpot F, while it is determined that it is a jackpot H if there is no V prize (pass of the gaming ball to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal does not turn on. it can.

  Further, by the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminals provided on the external output plate 261, it can be easily determined whether the jackpot generated is a continued jackpot. Specifically, in the jackpot 1 terminal, since the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot is finished, the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether the jackpot is a continued jackpot Can not. Here, the continued jackpot refers to the jackpot during the odd change game or the short time game.

  When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example becomes a jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the output is on). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpot generated during the ON period of the jackpot 2 terminal output (the jackpot 1 terminal output turned ON) is a series of continued jackpots.

<About control processing of main controller in eighth control example>
Next, control processing of main controller 110 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a part of the special symbol variation processing and the external output processing is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing (S104). In the eighth control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit when the fluctuation time elapses compared to the first control example described above (S216: Yes), the jackpot type according to the lottery result is a jackpot type storage area 203α The configuration is different from that in the configuration of storing in the other, and the other parts are the same, so the detailed description of the parts will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation processing, first, the processing of S201 to S216 is executed as in the first control example. Next, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), an open scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the big hit type (S217), and the start of big hit is set (S218) . Thereafter, a value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referred to in external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of the signal to be output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

  When the process of S260 is finished, the present process ends. If it is determined in the process of S216 that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed as in the first control example, and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the details of the external output processing (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the external output process (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, and the command set in the other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is This processing is processing for transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, processing for outputting a signal to the external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is in the jackpot (S7001). If it is determined in the process of S7001 that the gaming state of the gaming machine is in the middle of a big hit (S7001: Yes), the output of the bonus product continuous operating terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (S7002) , Shift to the process of S7003. The character continuous actuation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002 is detected by the hall computer 262. Thus, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating a jackpot G (S7003). When it is determined in the process of S7003 that the value of the big hit type storage area 203α is a value indicating big hit G (S7003: Yes), the output to the big hit 1 terminal and the output to the big hit 2 terminals are turned on ( The process proceeds to S7004) and S7010. By the processing of S7004, at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, the outputs to the jack 1 terminal and jack 2 terminal are turned on, and the jack 1 terminal and jack 2 terminal are detected by the hall computer 262. Accordingly, the hall computer 262 detects that the character continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002 and the jackpot 1 terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7004 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174 (a)), it can be determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot G has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot F or jackpot H and is not the value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the process of S7005, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on. When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes), it is a case where the gaming ball enters the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is determined that the probability variation game is given after the big hit game is over . In this case, the process proceeds to the process of S7004, the outputs to the large hit 1 terminal and the large hit 2 terminal are turned on (S7004), and the process proceeds to S7010.

  Here, since the jackpot F is a jackpot with a probability variation lottery, the passage solenoid 65k operates during execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without a probability variation lottery, the passage solenoid 65k does not operate during execution of a jackpot game, and the gaming ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the hall computer 262 is the jackpot based on the jackpot F when the jackpot 1 terminal output is turned on when passing the probability change switch 65e3 after the character continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on at the start of the jackpot game. It can be determined that a game has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the jack continuous action terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game and then the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the jackpot game based on the jackpot H where the gaming ball does not pass to the probability change switch 65e3 is executed It can be determined that the

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7005 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S7005: No), the process proceeds to S7010.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not in the process of S7001 (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), and the output to the bonus character continuous operation terminal and the jack to one jack The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

  When the process of S7007 is finished, it is then determined whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008). Specifically, it is determined that the probability variation gaming state is in the case where the probability variation flag 203g is on, and it is determined that the timing variation gaming state is in the case where the time reduction counter is greater than zero. If it is determined in the process of S7008 that the game is in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S7010 without turning off the output to the jackpot 2 terminal. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7008 that the game is not the probability game state or the short game state (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (S7009), and the process proceeds to S7010.

  By the process of S7007, it is possible to turn off the outputs of the bonus continuous operating terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the jackpot game is given a definite change game or a short time game, and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes a definite change game state or a short time game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the big hit 2 terminal is not turned off, The jackpot 2 terminal output is turned on continuously. On the other hand, when no jackpot game or time saving game is given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off.

  In the process of S7010, another external output process is executed (S7010), and this process is ended. In the process of S7010, for example, a process of transmitting various commands such as a pending ball number command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the above-described RAM 203 to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. . Thereby, the information from the main control device 110 can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111.

  As described above, in the eighth control example, according to the jackpot type of the lottery result, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type, the timing of the signal transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is different. It is configured to Specifically, in the case of the jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the character continuous operation terminal is turned on, and then the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Also, in the case of the jackpot G, when the jackpot game is started, the character continuous operation terminal is turned on and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Furthermore, in the case of the jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the character continuous actuation terminal is turned on, and thereafter the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on until the gift continuous actuation terminal is turned off.

  Thus, the hall computer 262 detecting the output of the terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is provided in three types by detecting the outputs of the product continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 and the big hit 1 terminal. It is possible to determine which jackpot type based on the jackpot type is being executed among jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing a terminal corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

  Further, by the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminals provided on the external output plate 261, it can be easily determined whether the jackpot generated is a continued jackpot. Specifically, in the jackpot 1 terminal, since the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot is finished, the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether the jackpot is a continued jackpot Can not. Here, the continued jackpot refers to the jackpot during the odd change game or the short time game.

  When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example becomes a jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the output is on). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpot generated during the ON period of the jackpot 2 terminal output (the jackpot 1 terminal output turned ON) is a series of continued jackpots.

  In the present control example, the jackpot type is determined by the character continuous actuation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type can be discriminated by the character continuous actuation terminal and the jack2 terminal. It is also good. In addition, one of the large hit 1 terminal and the large hit 2 terminal may not be provided, and a terminal for performing an output related to the large hit may be separately provided to the external output terminal plate 261.

  Furthermore, this control example is not limited to the above-described one, and other terminals of the external output terminal board 261 for outputting information related to the jackpot game may be provided. For example, the V output terminal board 261 may be provided with a V prize terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) based on the passage of the probability change switch 65 e 3. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent action such as passing the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3 regardless of whether or not the jackpot H of the jackpot H with no definite variation lottery is being executed. Specifically, based on passage of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on, but in the case of the jackpot type H, even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 Terminal output does not turn on. Therefore, when the output of the V winning terminal is turned on, but the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the hall computer 262 detects that the gaming ball has entered the probability changing switch 65e3 by cheating and thus the cheating is detected. Can be notified.

  Also, in the eighth control example described above, a character continuous operation terminal indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal is not provided, and one jack terminal is on The hall computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type according to the time difference.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game of jackpot G is executed, the output of jackpot 1 terminal is turned on at the start of jackpot game, and the output of jackpot 1 terminal is turned off at the end of jackpot game. In this case, the time for which the jackpot 1 terminal output is turned on is the jackpot game time (for example, 120 seconds). In addition, when the jackpot game of jackpot F is executed, the output of jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of jackpot game, and the output of jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the game ball passes to probability change switch 65e3, and jackpot game Turns off the jackpot 1 terminal output at the end. In this case, the time for which the jackpot 1 terminal output is on is shorter than the jackpot game time, and is the time from the period when the flow path solenoid 65k is operating to the end of the jackpot game (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds) . Furthermore, when the jackpot game of the jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, one second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of the jack 1 terminal is on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  By configuring in this manner, the hole computer 262 determines that the jackpot game by the jackpot G is being executed when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal has been on is 120 seconds. it can. In addition, if the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal has been on is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game by jackpot F has been executed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the time when the output of the big hit 1 terminal has been on is 1 second, it can be determined that the big hit game by the big hit H has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of determining the jackpot type related to the jackpot game being executed by the hall computer 262 without providing the bonus product continuous operation terminal, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, the time when the output of jackpot 1 terminal is on is all defined for each jackpot type, and the jackpot 1 terminal output is turned on only for the on-time defined at a predetermined trigger (for example, jackpot start time). It is also good.

  Furthermore, in the eighth control example, a terminal (prize terminal) of the external output terminal 261 may be provided, the output of which is set to be on based on the entry into the specific winning opening 65a. Thereby, the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, but when the game ball is not entered into the specific winning opening 65a due to the game ball not being fired, etc., the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 The jackpot F can not be detected because the outputs with jacks 1 and jacks 2 are not turned on. Therefore, by detecting a winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the probability change switch 65e3 despite the fact that the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. It can be determined whether or not the game ball has not passed (in the case of the jackpot H).

<The ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 178 to FIG. 180, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. In the ninth control example, an external output terminal plate 261 is provided which outputs a signal in response to a winning on the specific winning opening 65a, as compared with the eighth control example described above, and a winning on the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Differs in that it can be detected.

  Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. Be done. The continuous winning terminal is controlled such that the output is kept on when there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (two seconds) after the occurrence of the winning and the continuous winning is being performed.

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, whether or not the generated winning is continued to be won by acquiring the signal of the winning terminal and the continuing winning terminal Can be determined. In addition, the hall computer 262 does not need to calculate the result of acquisition of the signal of the winning terminal to determine whether or not the continued winning has occurred, and a process that needs to be executed when the continued winning has occurred. The processing load can be reduced by executing the above based on the acquisition result of the signal of the continuous winning terminal.

  Although the present control example adds the above-described configuration to the eighth control example, the present control example is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. For example, the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal may be controlled in accordance with entering the V winning device in the fifth control example. In the following description, points different from the eighth control example will be described. About the part same as the 8th example of a control, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the ninth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 in this control example is different in that a winning period counter 203β and a continuous winning period counter 203γ are provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 in the eighth control example described above. Since the other points are the same, the detailed description about the same part is omitted.

  The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting a period in which a signal is output to the winning terminal (winning output period). In the external output process executed in the main process of main controller 110, winning period counter 203β determines that the game ball has entered ball (a winning) in specified winning hole 65a (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) is set (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every four milliseconds in the main process of the main control unit 110, and whenever the external output process is executed, the winning period counter 203β is 1 or more (see FIG. S8008 of 180: Yes), one by one (see S8009 in FIG. 180). Then, when the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004 in FIG. 180: Yes), the output of the external output terminal board 261 to the winning terminal is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

  Thus, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) based on the winning on the specific winning opening 65a.

  The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting a period during which a signal is output to the continuous winning terminal. In the external output process executed in the main process of main controller 110, it is determined that continuous winning period counter 203γ has entered a game ball to specified winning hole 65a (winning) (see FIG. 180). S8001: Yes) and 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) are set (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every four milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and whenever the external output process is executed, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 1 or more. (S8010 in FIG. 180: Yes), 1 is decremented (see S8011 in FIG. 180). Then, when the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF. If the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is again set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

  Thus, while the game ball is entering the special winning device 65a during the period (2 seconds in this control example) until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 You can keep the output to on. If the gaming ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ has passed, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signals output from the bonus continuous operating terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal when the jackpot game is executed. .

  With reference to FIG. 179 (a), the case where the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 179 (a) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine and the bonus continuous operating terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal when the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game. Is a timing chart showing a signal output from

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the bonus continuous actuation device is not operating, the bonus continuous operating terminal is off, and the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Because there is no ball, both the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are off.

  Then, the lottery result based on entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and when the bonus continuous actuation device is activated, the bonus continuous actuation terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180) reference). When the prize continuous actuation device is actuated, the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, and the gaming ball can enter the specified winning opening 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the gaming ball has entered the specified winning opening 65a (winning) after the operation of the bonus product continuous actuation device, the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are for a predetermined time (in this control example It is controlled to turn on for 100 milliseconds and 2 seconds (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuation of the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) and is turned off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has elapsed (S8007 in FIG. 180). Thereafter, when the jackpot game is over, the bonus continuous operating device is stopped, and the output of the bonus continuous operating terminal is set to off, and the transition to the normal game (or the probability game or the time saving game) is made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179 (b), a case will be described where the gaming ball enters the specified winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and there is a new entering in the continuous winning output period based on the entering ball. FIG. 179 (b) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine and the exterior when the gaming ball enters the specified winning opening 65a during the big hit game and there is a new entering in the continuous winning output period based on the entering ball. It is the timing chart which showed the signal which is output from the item continuous operating terminal of the output terminal board 261, the winning a prize terminal and the continuing winning a prize terminal.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, as described above, the bonus continuous operating terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all off. Next, when the lottery result based on entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit and the big hit game is started, the bonus continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

  Then, when the gaming ball enters the specified winning opening 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects the entering of the gaming ball, and the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example) ) Is controlled to be on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). After that, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous winning device remains on until after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds). (S8006: Yes in FIG. 180).

  When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has newly entered the specified winning opening 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal turns on the winning output period (100 milliseconds) Are set (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Further, the output of the winning continuation terminal is also reset (updated) so as to turn on the continuous winning output period (two seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is set to OFF after the elapse of the winning output period based on the new entry to the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and then continues after the updated continuous winning period has elapsed. The output of the winning terminal is set to off (S8007 in FIG. 180). In the updated (re-set) continuous winning period, when the game ball newly enters the specified winning opening 65a, the continuous winning period is updated (re-set) again, and the continuous winning terminal is continuously The output is set to be turned on.

  When the big hit game is over, the feature continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the feature continuous operation terminal is set to off, and the transition to the normal game (or the probability change game or the time saving game) is made.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to determine that the game ball is continuously entering the specified winning opening 65a (winning) by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. . Thereby, the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261 detects that the gaming ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) by the prize terminals provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is continued. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal continues, it is determined only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without calculating based on the previous winning information. The processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

<About control processing of main controller in ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, control processing of the main control device in the present control example will be described. The ninth control example is different from the above-described eighth control example in that a part of the external output processing is changed. The other parts are the same, so detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  The details of the external output process (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the external output process (S1001) in this control example. This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, and the command set in the other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is This processing is processing for transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, processing for outputting a signal to the external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001). Specifically, since the gaming ball having entered the specific winning opening 65a passes the detection switch 65c1, depending on whether or not the switch of the detection switch 65c1 is turned on in the switch reading process of the main control device 110. Determine.

  When it is determined in the process of S8001 that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: Yes), the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 are set to ON (S8002) The winning period counter 203β is set to 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds), and the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (S8003), and the processing proceeds to S8008.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8001 that the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: No), then it is determined whether the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the process of S8004, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), if the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed since the gaming ball entered the specified winning opening 65a. Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is set to off, and the process proceeds to the process of S8008.

  If it is determined in the process of S8004 that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 or not (S8006). If it is determined in the process of S8006 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) elapses after the gaming ball enters the specified winning opening 65a, Since the game ball has not newly entered the specific winning opening 65a in the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (S8007), and Transfer to processing.

  If it is determined in the process of S8006 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process proceeds to the process of S8008 as it is.

  Here, if the gaming state of the gaming machine is a state other than the jackpot gaming state, etc., the processing of S8005 is not performed even if the winning period counter 203β has already become 0 without entering the specific winning opening 65a. Is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is already off, the output of the winning terminal is set to be continuously turned off. Since the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a only during the big hit game, the processes of S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the big hit game.

  As a result, in the gaming state other than during the jackpot game, there is no need to execute the processing of S8001 to S8007, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, if the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the jackpot game, it is conceivable that cheating or an abnormality will occur, so a separate error terminal is provided on the external output terminal 261, and for that error By turning on the output of the terminal, it may be configured to be able to detect fraud or abnormal occurrence. In addition, it is not necessary to use the terminal for an error for detection of a wrongdoing or abnormality occurrence, and outputs an alarm sound notifying an error, or causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a display indicating the occurrence of an error. You may do it.

  When the process of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008). If it is determined in the process of S8008 that the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008: Yes), the gaming ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since there is a winning output period (100 milliseconds), the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8009), and the process proceeds to S8010.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 in the process of S8008 (S8010: Yes), the process of S8009 is skipped because it is not necessary to measure the winning output period instead of the winning output period. Then, the process proceeds to step S8010. In the process of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010). If it is determined in the process of S8010 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 (S8010: Yes), the gaming ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is on. Since it is the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the continuous winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

  If it is determined in the process of S8010 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8010: No), the process of S8011 is skipped because it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period, not the continuous winning output period. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the process of S8012, another external output process is executed (S8012). The other external output process is, for example, an external output terminal indicating that the character continuous actuation device operates, that is, a period in which the jackpot game is executed, as in the above-described external output process in the eighth control example. A process of turning on the product continuous operation terminal of the plate 261 with a predetermined trigger is performed. When the process of S8012 ends, the present process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the ninth control example, it is determined that the game ball continues to enter the specified winning opening 65a (winning) by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. Be done. On the other hand, the continuous winning terminal is controlled such that the output is kept on when there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the occurrence of the winning and the continuous winning is being performed.

  Thereby, the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261 detects that the gaming ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) by the prize terminals provided on the external output terminal board 261. It can be determined from the output of the continuous winning terminal whether or not the winning is continued to be won. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal continues, it is determined only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without calculating based on the previous winning information. The processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

  The present control example is not limited to the above-described one, and the output of the continuous winning terminal may be continued only at the specific jackpot type. Thus, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 such as the hall computer 262 detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal to determine the type of jackpot that has become a big hit. It can be enabled.

  Further, based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a, the period (winning output period) in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on may be different for each big hit type. For example, if the jackpot type is a jackpot F, the winning output period is 50 milliseconds, if the jackpot G, then the winning output period is 100 milliseconds. If the jackpot is H, the winning output period is 150 milliseconds. Thereby, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261, and measures the period (the winning output period) in which the output of the winning terminal is on, whereby the big hit of the jackpot game being executed. The type can be determined. Therefore, for the purpose of determining the jackpot type, without providing a separate terminal on the external output terminal board 261, it can be a gaming machine capable of discriminating the jackpot type, reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine be able to.

  Furthermore, in the ninth control example, the game ball is sent to the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to set it shorter than the pitching interval. When the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a anew during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is continuously turned on, and the hole computer 262 can not accurately detect the winning number. It is. In addition, when the winning output period becomes short, the detection interval of the winning terminals by the hall computer 262 needs to be correspondingly short. If the output of the winning terminal is not detected within the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal is turned off, and the number of winnings can not be accurately detected.

  Therefore, if the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is very short (such as 10 milliseconds), it is necessary for the hall computer 262 to detect the winning terminals of the external output terminal plate 261 at the very short intervals. There is a problem that the processing load of the hall computer 262 becomes high.

  Therefore, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a anew during the winning output period, the period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off after the winning output period ends (winning output stop period ) So that the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on the gaming ball newly entered into the specified winning opening 65a after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed. You may

  As a result, even when the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is set to a period (for example, 100 milliseconds) longer than the interval at which the game ball enters, the winning output period is newly entered. Since the output based on the ball game ball can be executed after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hole computer 262 can accurately detect (do not miss) winning. Further, in the hall computer 262, there is no need to detect the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at an interval (for example, 5 milliseconds) shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters the ball. It can be reduced.

  Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the big hit game. In the big hit game, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and the state (round) in which the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a is configured to be executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds) There is. This round is ended by the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) or the entry of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) to the specific winning hole 65a, and thereafter an interval between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The next round will begin. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set longer than the interval at which the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the external output terminal is based on all entering balls (for example, 10 balls) during the interval between rounds. The output of the winning terminal of the board 261 can be made.

  Specifically, when 10 game balls enter the specified winning opening 65a continuously at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the game ball enters the specified winning opening 65a (10 balls) It is necessary to set the prize output period (100 milliseconds) on for a total of 10 times of the prize terminals of the external output terminal board 261 based on the minute). Here, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a anew during the winning output period, after the winning output period ends and the output of the winning terminal is turned off, after the winning output stop period (50 milliseconds), It is assumed that the next prize output period is started. In this case, the time required to output signals based on all entering balls to the winning terminals of the external output terminal plate 261 is the number of times the output of the winning terminals is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds) And the product of the number of winning output periods required (9 times) after the output of the winning terminal and the winning output period (50 milliseconds) are added to obtain 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the inter-round interval (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is finished based on all the entering balls (for example, 10 balls) in the interval of the inter-round interval. Is possible.

  Therefore, even when the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is a period (for example, 100 milliseconds) longer than the interval at which the game ball enters, the winning output period is newly entered. Since all the outputs based on the played game balls can be executed during the interval between rounds thereafter, the hole computer 262 can detect (do not miss) a prize. In addition, even if it is not possible to execute all the outputs based on the game ball newly entered in the winning output period during the interval between rounds, the specific winning is achieved even after the big hit is performed until the next big hit is performed. Since there is a period during which the game ball does not enter the mouth 65a (interval of the big hit game), it may be configured to be able to execute in the interval of the big hit game. In addition, the specific example mentioned above is an example, and periods, such as a prize output period, a prize output stop period, and an interval between rounds, may be changed suitably.

  Further, in the ninth control example, for example, based on passage of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, a V prize terminal for outputting an on signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) is provided on the external output terminal plate 261 You may do so. As a result, by comparing the output timing of the V terminal with the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on entering the specific winning port 65a, the incorrect V winning (the game ball entering the probability change switch 65e3) It becomes possible to determine with the hall computer 262 whether or not the ball has been performed.

  Specifically, although the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, although the gaming ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a, passage of the gaming ball to the probability change switch 65e3 is detected, and V When the output of the winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that the V-winning (the gaming ball has entered the positive change switch 65e3) is illegal. Therefore, the case where the V prize terminal is on regardless of the output of the prize terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be detected as being incorrect or abnormal.

  Furthermore, a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a predetermined passage time (for example, one second) is required for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, by setting the period (continuous winning output period) in which the continuous winning terminal is on (the continuous winning output period) to the required time (1 second), the V winning terminal is turned off in the period (other than the continuous winning output period). The hole computer 262 can detect the case of being turned on as an incorrect V winning.

  Specifically, the gaming balls having entered the specified winning opening 65a are normally allocated to either the discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 after the passage of a predetermined passing time (1 second), It does not pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 after the passage of a predetermined passing time (one second). Therefore, when the continuous winning terminal which is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a and then turned off after the passage of a predetermined passing time (1 second) is turned off, the probability change switch The game ball never passes 65e3. Therefore, when the V winning terminal is turned on during the period in which the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined as an incorrect V winning.

  All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Example of the technical concept of the moving member moved only by the biasing force>
An urging device for generating an elastic urging force in one direction, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device from a retracted position located outward of the display region of the liquid crystal display device by the urging force generated by the urging device A movable member movably formed to a predetermined position located on the front side, a position regulating device formed to be able to regulate the movement of the movable member at the retracted position, and a release for releasing the regulation by the position regulated device A game machine A1 comprising: an apparatus.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member movable between a first position and a second position, and a drive motor generating a driving force for moving the moving member, There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, JP-A-2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when moving the moving member by motor drive, it is easy to accelerate the moving member gradually to achieve high speed, but it is possible to move the moving member at high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member formed movable from the retracted position to the predetermined position by the biasing force in one direction is restricted in movement by the position regulating device at the retracted position (stopped) ). Then, when the restriction by the position restricting device is released by the releasing device, the moving member is started to move by the biasing force accumulated by being disposed at the retracted position.

  Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed to a target value from the start time of starting the movement of the moving member from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at high speed.

  In addition, as the biasing device, a device utilizing the repulsive force of a magnet, a device utilizing spring elasticity, etc. are exemplified, and as the releasing device, a driving device for giving a driving force for mechanically moving the position regulating device, An apparatus etc. which cancel electromagnetic adsorption of a position control device are illustrated.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a driving device having a function of generating a driving force for moving at least the moving member from the predetermined position toward the retracted position, and the driving device constitutes the releasing device. A game machine A2.

  Here, when the moving member is moved by the biasing force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the biasing force is required in order to perform the effect repeatedly. Therefore, a space is required to provide a device for generating the driving force. However, since the space for arranging the moving member and the driving device inside the gaming machine is limited, there is a possibility that the space for arranging the moving member can not be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the releasing device is constituted by the driving device, so that the releasing of the driving device from the regulation of the moving member It can also be used to return to Therefore, the installation space of the release device and the drive device can be reduced as compared with the case where the drive device is separately prepared.

  In addition, after the moving member moves from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the drive device, so that effects by the moving member can be repeated.

  In addition, a motor, an air cylinder, etc. are illustrated as a drive device.

  In the gaming machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported on the base end side, and the position regulating device is projected from a first rotating body rotated about a first axis, and the first rotating body. And a pin member located eccentrically to the first axis, the pin member being connected to the moving member at the base end side of the moving member, and the moving member being disposed at the retracted position , The direction in which the first axis and the pin member are connected is orthogonal to the direction in which the rotation axis formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member are connected. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, when the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are connected. The direction is formed to be orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation axis formed on the proximal end side of the moving member and the pin member.

  Therefore, by moving the movable member to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the first rotary body and the movable member, and the movable member is mechanically held at the retracted position. it can. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to detect that the moving member is disposed at the retracted position and operate the position regulating device to restrict the moving member.

  In addition, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotary shaft on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member is at the retracted position without driving force such as a drive motor. It is possible to secure a large regulatory force. Therefore, the biasing force accumulated in the biasing device can be largely secured, and the effect of starting the moving member at high speed can be made remarkable.

  In the gaming machine A3, the moving member is provided with a guide portion for guiding the pin member, and a straight line connecting the pin member of the position regulating device and the first axis in at least one of the retracted position or the predetermined position. And the direction in which the guide portion extends are coincident with each other, and the position control device is engaged with the drive device and the drive force generated by the drive device is transmitted A game machine A4 characterized in that the pin member can be moved along the guide by being rotated.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, when the moving member starts rotating from the state where the moving member is disposed at the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion are extended. Since the directions coincide with each other, the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide at the start of rotation of the first rotating body can be suppressed.

  Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position regulating device with respect to the moving member, it is necessary when shifting the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotary shaft on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member (rotating the position regulating device). The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

  In any one of game machines A2 to A4, an engagement state in which the position restriction device and the drive device engage with each other and a non-engagement state in which the position restriction device and the drive device are disengaged are formed. It is possible that the non-engagement state is formed at least when the moving member starts from the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the driving device form a non-engagement state, whereby resistance that can be applied to the position regulating device As a result, the starting resistance of the moving member can be reduced. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by the engagement between the drive device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large drive unit is selected to counter the biasing force of the biasing unit, high speed at the time of starting of the moving member can be secured, so that the design freedom of the biasing unit can be improved. That is, it becomes possible to select an urging device having a larger urging force.

  In addition, as an aspect which forms a non-engagement state with a position control apparatus and a drive device, a gear is engraved by the side of the 1st rotary body of a position control apparatus, for example, and the gear engaged with the gear is partial. When the driving force of the drive device is transmitted by the meshing of the gears of the first and second rotors, or A magnetic body is formed on the side surface of one rotation body, and a second rotation body on which a magnetic body adsorbed by the magnetic body is partially formed is disposed in the drive device, and the first rotation body and the second rotation body The case where a drive device is transmitted by adsorption with is illustrated.

  More specifically, in the case where the first rotation state and the second rotation body transmit the driving force by gear engagement, at least one gear of the first rotation body or the second rotation body is partially formed. Thus, the position regulating device and the drive device are in the engaged state in the gear meshing region, and the position regulating device and the drive in the region where the gear meshing is released (a region in which the gear is not formed). The device forms a disengaging state.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, the game machine comprises an effect member pivotally supported by the movable member so as to be pivotable and disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display when the movable member is disposed at least at a predetermined position, the movement The member is extended from the base end side to the swinging end side which is the end opposite to the base end side, and the extension direction is a longitudinal direction, and the base end side is the liquid crystal The display member is pivotally supported at the outside of the display area of the display device, and the effect member has a length in a first direction longer than a length in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. In the retracted position, the first direction is oriented along the longitudinal direction of the movable member, and at the predetermined position, the first direction is tangential to the rotation trajectory of the movable member. And one of the first directions Gaming machine A6 but characterized by taking the posture that projects on the opposite side of the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the effect member is disposed at the retracted position, the effect member has its first direction in the longitudinal direction of the moving member It is considered to be along the line. Therefore, even when it is difficult to form a space in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the movable member outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, the rendering member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be made easy to set up.

  In addition, when the effect member is disposed at the predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed tangential to the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction is the effect end Since it is overhanged on the opposite side of the retreat position, the effect can be performed by effectively using the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  As a case where it is difficult to form a space in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the movable member outside the liquid crystal display device, for example, a case where a retracted position is disposed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device is illustrated. Be done.

  The gaming machine A6 includes a first guiding portion formed in a plane perpendicular to the swing axis formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guiding portion A game machine A7 comprising a first projecting portion, wherein the change in the attitude of the effect member is caused by the first projecting portion being guided by the first guiding portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the change in the attitude of the effect member is caused by the projecting portion of the effect member being guided by the first guide portion. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom.

  That is, for example, when the change in the attitude of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted by moving the moving member upward, whether the effect member is gradually inclined in the process of moving the moving member upward Depending on the design of the first guiding portion, it can be optionally selected whether the rendering member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is disposed at the rising moving end.

  In addition, as the first guide portion, an elongated hole formed in a mode having a longitudinal direction while being formed through, a groove formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, etc. are exemplified, and the guide As an aspect, the aspect in which the first projecting portion slides on the first guiding portion, the aspect in which the rotating body is disposed on the first projecting portion, and the rotating body is rolled on the first guiding portion, etc. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guiding portion is a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swinging axis of the moving member, and the swinging axis of the moving member is centered And a concentric portion extending along the circle, the concentric portion being formed on the predetermined position side, and the posture change portion being formed on the retracted position side. A game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7, the moving member and the effecting member do not change the posture with respect to the moving member by shortening the period during which the effecting member changes the posture with respect to the moving member. The period of movement as one can be extended.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the rendering member is guided by the posture changing portion, the end of the rendering member and the rendering end The distance to the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the shaft portion is largely changed, and the change in posture of the effect member can be made large with respect to the rotation angle of the movable member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric portion extends along the circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided by the concentric portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and the effect The rendering member is moved in a state in which the relative positional relationship between the member and the pivotally supported position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the concentric circle portion is formed on the predetermined position side, the effect member and the moving member can be viewed by the player integrally as a unit over a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guiding portion is a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swinging axis of the moving member, and the swinging axis of the moving member is centered A game machine A9, comprising: a concentric circle section extending along a circle, and the posture changing section is formed on the predetermined position side.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7, the moving member and the effecting member do not change their attitude with respect to the moving member by shortening the period during which the effecting member changes the attitude with respect to the moving member. The period of movement as one can be extended.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the rendering member is guided by the posture changing portion, the end of the rendering member and the rendering end The distance to the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the shaft portion is largely changed, and the change in posture of the effect member can be made large with respect to the rotation angle of the movable member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric portion extends along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided by the first guide portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and The effecting member is moved in a state where the relative positional relationship between the effecting member and the pivotally supported position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side, it is possible to quickly change the posture of the effect member in a state where the effect member is visually recognized by the player.

  The game machine according to any one of A6 to A9, further comprising: a second guide portion formed in a plane perpendicular to the rocking axis of the movable member, and extending along a rotation trajectory of the movable member, the movement being The member comprises at least one second projection guided by the second guiding part, the second projection being integrally formed with the moving member, the moving member being disposed at the predetermined position In this case, the second projecting portion is in contact with one end of the second guiding portion.

  Since the moving member is moved by the biasing force of the biasing device, the motor can not be stopped to reduce the force of the moving member as in the case of motor driving, and the stopper for reducing the force of the moving member It is necessary to form a mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position, the second projecting portion is in contact with the end of the second guiding portion. By being in contact, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

  In addition, since the second protrusion is guided by the second guide extending along the rotational trajectory of the movable member, the second guide and the second protrusion optimize the rotation of the movable member at the same time. Wobble of the moving member in the rocking axis direction can be suppressed.

  Here, the first projecting portion and the first guide portion of the effect member may be brought into contact with each other to have a role as a stopper. However, since the effect member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion A strong problem arises in a minute. On the other hand, since the second projecting portion is integrally protruded from the moving member, the strength problem is small, and the reliability as the stopper can be enhanced.

  By forming a plurality of sets of the second protrusion and the second guide, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches the predetermined position. Thereby, the durability of the second protrusion can be improved. In addition, as the second guide portion, an elongated hole formed in a mode having a longitudinal direction while being formed through, a groove formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, etc. are exemplified and also As an aspect, the aspect in which the second projection is slid on the second guide, the aspect in which the rotating body is disposed on the second projection, and the rotor is rolled on the second guide, etc. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the one end portion than the other end portion which is the end opposite to the one end portion. A game machine A11 characterized in that the width is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the second guiding portion is formed in a mode in which the groove width is reduced at one end compared to the other end. That is, since the gap formed by the second projection and the second guide when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position is largely secured, the resistance at the start of the moving member can be suppressed. Further, the gap formed by the second projecting portion and the second guiding portion when the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position can be reduced, and the wobble of the second projecting portion can be suppressed.

  Here, as an aspect in which the groove width of the second guiding portion is reduced, the groove width may be gradually reduced from one end of the second guiding portion toward the other end, or the second guiding portion The case where the groove width is sharply reduced at a part of (the degree of reduction of the groove width is formed by at least two types) is exemplified.

  In the case where the second guide portion is formed by a through hole and the second protrusion is inserted into the second guide and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protrusion, the second guide may be pierced. Even if the thickness in the installation direction is formed in such a manner that one end is reduced as compared to the other end, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, in the case where the moving member is disposed at the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the moving member from being wobbled particularly in the direction in which the second guide portion is pierced.

  In the gaming machine A11, the swinging movement of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by an upward movement, and the second guide portion has a small diameter side face from the one end to the other end The gap with the second protrusion is reduced over the vicinity of the portion, and the gap with the second protrusion is increased at the other end compared with the gap, and the side surface on the large diameter side is The gap with the second protrusion is reduced at the one end, and the second protrusion is extended from the vicinity of the one end to the vicinity of the other end as compared with the gap. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that the gap is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the swinging movement of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by the upward movement, so when the moving member is swung from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member is rocked. When moving slightly in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to the play with the shaft, the second protrusion is likely to abut on the small diameter side of the second guide. Here, on the small diameter side of the second guide portion, the gap with the second projecting portion is made small at the initial stage of the process of swinging the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position. As a result, the swinging of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position can be smoothed.

  Further, in the case of swinging from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second protrusion is likely to abut on the large diameter side of the second guide. Here, the moving member is swung to a predetermined position on the large diameter side of the second guide portion, and the gap with the second projecting portion is finally reduced. Thereby, when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive device can be improved.

  In any one of game machines A6 to A12, the movable member is provided with a main body portion extending from the base end side to the swinging end side, and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member in the main body portion. A decorative portion is provided on the front side at a distance, and when the effect of the effect member changes, at least one of the one end in the first direction or the other end opposite to the one end is the body portion A game machine A13 which is housed between the decorative portion and the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the directing member changes the attitude, at least one of both ends of the directing member in the first direction is the main body portion and the decorative portion It is stored with a slight gap between them. Therefore, when the effect member changes its posture, the main body and the decorative portion serve as a guide that prevents the movement of the effect member if the effect member can move largely in the swing axis direction with respect to the main body for some reason. The large movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction can be restricted.

  According to this, when the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a stacked relationship, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory.

  In the gaming machine A13, the movement locus of any part of the effect member and the movement locus of any part of the decorative member are the swings of the effect member in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A game machine A14 characterized by overlapping in a motion axial direction view.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably accommodated between the main body portion and the decorative portion inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thus, as compared with the case where the effect member is accommodated between the main body portion and the decorative portion for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case where the fixing plate prevents misalignment in the front and rear direction, It is possible to exhibit the guide function of restricting the movement of the effect member in the direction of the rocking axis from an earlier stage.

  Thus, when a plurality of moving units are stacked, not only interference between moving members of the moving units outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device but also movement units in the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device Interference between moving members can be prevented.

<An example of the technical idea that suppresses the wobble of the moving member>
A movable member slidably formed at a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first drive device generating a driving force for driving the movable member, an effect member disposed on the movable member, and an effect member A second drive device for generating a driving force for driving the game machine, wherein the retracted position is a position spaced apart from the predetermined position in the lateral direction of the gaming machine by a predetermined distance and from the predetermined position It is a position separated by a predetermined distance upward in the vertical direction of the gaming machine, at least the predetermined position being a movement end of the moving member, and at least the moving member being arranged at the predetermined position. A game machine B1 characterized in that it is driven.

  Here, a moving member slidably formed, and a rendering member disposed on the moving member and driven independently of the moving member are provided, and the moving member is slid in the horizontal direction. There is a game machine (see, for example, JP 2012-085811 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the moving member receives the force due to the reaction of the driving of the rendering member, and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction, so to maintain the moving member in a predetermined position, the rendering member It is necessary to continue to apply a force to the moving member to resist the force due to the reaction of the driving force.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position which is the movement end of the moving member is formed obliquely downward of the retreat position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second drive device at a predetermined position, and the moving member receives a force due to the reaction, the force by the weight of the moving member acts toward the predetermined position to move the moving member to the predetermined position The moving member can be maintained at the predetermined position even if the driving force given from the first drive device to the moving member is unnecessary.

  The vertical direction of the gaming machine means the direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the horizontal direction of the gaming machine means the direction intersecting the vertical direction of the gaming machine substantially perpendicularly Do.

  As a method of transmitting the driving force of the first drive device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first drive device. A method, a method of attaching a belt to the base end side of the moving member, and a method of winding the belt are exemplified.

  The gaming machine B1 includes an auxiliary member arranged at a predetermined distance away in a direction perpendicular to a plane in which the movable member slides, the liquid crystal display in a state where the movable member is at least arranged at the predetermined position. A projecting portion formed inward of a display area of the device, and in a state where the moving member is disposed at least at the predetermined position, a direction perpendicular to a plane in which the projecting portion slides the moving member When rock | fluctuated, it is contact | abutted with the said auxiliary member, game machine B2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, since the projecting portion of the moving member is formed to protrude inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position, interference with other objects is prevented. Therefore, it is required to suppress the swing in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the auxiliary member is disposed at a predetermined distance away in the direction perpendicular to the plane where the moving member slides, and the moving member is at the predetermined position. In the disposed state, when the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member abut. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wobble of the overhang portion and to prevent the collision between the other portion and the overhang portion.

  In the gaming machine B2, gaming machine B3 characterized in that the rigidity of the base side is weakened as compared with the leading end side.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, since the rigidity on the base side is weakened as compared to the leading end side of the overhanging portion, the wobble generated at the distal end of the overhanging portion is the overhanging portion It can weaken the degree to be transmitted to the root side.

  Here, as a method of weakening the rigidity, a case in which the overhanging portion is made of a resin material partially different in rigidity by two-color molding, a case in which the thickness of the overhanging portion is partially changed, etc. .

  When the overhanging portion is formed to be thin in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, the bending deformation of the overhanging portion can prevent the moving member from being shaken in the sliding movement direction.

  In addition, when the base side of the overhanging portion is formed thinner than the tip end side, the wobble at the tip end side of the overhanging portion is converted into bending deformation with the base end side of the overhanging portion as a fulcrum. Thus, horizontal movement of the movable member in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the movable member slides can be suppressed on the base side of the overhanging portion.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the auxiliary member has one end pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end which is the opposite end of the one end is the display area of the liquid crystal display device The auxiliary member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is pivotally supported on the outer side and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  Thus, the other moving member is disposed in the same layer as the layer in which the moving member is disposed, and when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the other moving member protrudes inward of the liquid crystal display device. It becomes possible to perform an effect and can perform various effects in a limited space.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the base member, an aspect in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the rotary shaft, or an aspect in which the projecting portion is provided with a projecting portion inserted into the elongated hole Is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B4, in a state where the movable member is disposed at the predetermined position, the overhanging portion extends along a direction from the pivoting portion of the one end of the auxiliary member to the other end. A game machine B5 having a contact portion extended.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion of the moving member is provided with the abutting portion, and the abutting portion is an auxiliary member in the state where the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the support of one end to the other end. Therefore, in the state where the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position, the area in which the moving member and the auxiliary member are in contact can be secured by the contact portion.

  In the gaming machine B5, the overhanging portion has a tip which is bent and extended from the extended tip of the contact portion, the effect member is disposed at the tip of the tip, and the movement is performed. A game machine B6 characterized in that the overlapping position of the overhanging part and the auxiliary member is moved to the tip side of the hand as the member slides to the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the effect member is disposed at the tip of the overhanging portion, and the sliding member moves to the retracted position and the projecting member and the assisting member The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand tip. Therefore, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, it is possible to shorten the extension (extension distance) of the overhanging portion extending to the effect member on the basis of the auxiliary member. As a result, even if the leading end side of the overhanging part is shaken by driving the effect member, the overhanging part can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from a stage where the wobble is small. As a result, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the effect of suppressing the wobble in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides can be made remarkable.

  In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the effect member is disposed below the moving member, and one end is pivotally supported by the moving member, and one end of the effect member is opposite to the other end A direction in which the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position, as compared with the case where the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. A game machine B7, wherein the longitudinal direction of the effect member is inclined in a horizontal direction.

  Since the moving member is moved obliquely downward toward the predetermined position, the moving member is provided to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device even when the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the lower end of the effect member needs to be disposed at a position elevated from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display by a distance by which the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position to a predetermined position. The Therefore, the lower part of the effect member when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position is wasted as a dead space.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3 or B4, the effect member is disposed below the moving member, and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, Since the angle between the longitudinal direction and the horizontal direction of the effect member is smaller when the move member is disposed at the predetermined position, the effect member is disposed when the move member is disposed at the predetermined position. Take a posture of falling horizontally.

  Therefore, even if the effect member is disposed at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the movable member is disposed at the retracted position, the movable member moves downward from the retracted position to a predetermined position. Can be absorbed by the change in posture of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the effect member when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position from being wasted as a dead space, and the effect member can be formed as a large member that is longer in the longitudinal direction.

  The gaming machine B7 includes a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member to the auxiliary member, and the auxiliary member moves compared to when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. A game machine B8 characterized in that when the member is disposed at the predetermined position, it takes a posture in which it is tilted in the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member has a horizontal direction when the movable member is disposed at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the movable member is disposed at the retracted position. And the other end of the effect member is connected to the auxiliary member via the connection member, so that the effect member is inclined in the horizontal direction as the auxiliary member is inclined in the horizontal direction. It can be done.

  Further, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via the auxiliary member pivotally supported by the moving member, since the effect member is supported by a plurality of members, the force generated by the driving of the effect member is The effect of suppressing dispersion of the effect member and the moving member can be made remarkable.

  A gaming machine B9 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B8, a center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member, so the weight of the effect member is effectively applied to the connecting member It can be done. Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position, a force directed in a direction to further tilt the auxiliary member can be effectively applied to the auxiliary member, so that the wobble of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wobble of the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the upper side in the vertical direction of the gaming machine at a position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B8, the gravity center position of the effect member is formed on the upper side of the gaming machine in the vertical direction of the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member. Can be equally distributed in the horizontal direction bordering on the pivotally supported position of the moving member and the effect member.

  Therefore, the wobble of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second driving device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, and as a result, the moving member and the effect member connected with the auxiliary member It is possible to generate wobble. As a result, by driving the effect member, it is possible to produce an effect that the moving member and the effect member are shaken.

<An example of a technical idea to reduce the number of assembly steps>
A base member having a pair of wall portions formed to project in the same direction, a lid member in contact with an overhanging end of at least one of the pair of wall portions, and both ends of the pair of wall portions A plurality of reflecting members rotatably supported rotatably and a light source for emitting light toward at least one reflecting member of the plurality of reflecting members, at least one of the pair of wall portions The wall portion has a plurality of pivoting grooves formed on the end face of the projecting end, and the reflecting member is pivotally supported by being protruded from the body portion and the body portion and being fitted into the pivoting groove. And at least one rotation shaft portion, and the rotation shaft portion fitted into the shaft support groove is fitted from the open end of the plurality of shaft support grooves, and the open end of the shaft support groove is in the lid member A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is pivotally supported by being blocked.

  Here, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable body pivotally supported at both ends and configured to be changeable in attitude to change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED light source (for example, JP 2008-272332 A). reference). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of LED light sources are provided, a plurality of movable bodies are also required, and the operation of inserting the movable bodies into the holes to support the movable bodies, and thereafter There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the work of attaching the parts for fixing the movable body from the hole so as not to be pulled out by the number of the movable body, and the number of assembling steps increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of pivoting grooves are formed in the wall portion of the base member, the rotary shaft portion of the reflecting member is fitted into the pivoting groove, and the open end of the pivoting groove is a lid member By being closed, the plurality of reflective members can be rotatably supported. By rotating these reflecting members, it is possible to change the direction of light emitted from the light source toward the reflecting members.

  Therefore, the operation of inserting the reflecting member into the hole to support the shaft and the operation of attaching a component (such as a screw or a stopper for preventing removal) for fixing the reflecting member so as not to be pulled out from the hole thereafter can be eliminated. Can be prevented from increasing the number of assembly steps in proportion to the number of

  In addition, as a case where a shaft support groove is formed in only one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is bored in the other side opposite to the one side, and the shaft portion of the reflection member is inserted obliquely into the hole. After that, when the reflecting member is turned over, the shaft formed on the other opposite side of the one is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is protruded from the other opposite side of the one, After the reflection member is externally fitted to the pin, the case where the shaft formed on the other side opposite to the one is fitted into the axial support groove is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C2 characterized in that the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion.

  Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member be thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the overhanging end face of the wall portion, the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is thin of the wall portion It becomes the lower limit, and the design freedom decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, since the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall, it is not limited to the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. can do.

  In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display region of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent to each other, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and the effect is produced by combining the display region of the liquid crystal display device and the reflective member It is possible to improve the effect of

  In the gaming machine C2, the lid member includes a plurality of pivot holes for pivotally supporting the rotating shaft portion of the reflection member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the rotary shaft portion of the reflection member is inserted into the axial support hole formed in the lid member, so the area for supporting the rotary shaft portion is a wall portion A sufficient area can be secured by the area for the thickness at which the rotary shaft portion is pivotally supported and the area for the formation length of the shaft support hole.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, at least one of the pair of wall portions includes an extending portion extending from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member is the extending portion. The fitting portion includes a fitting portion to be fitted to the installation portion, and in the state where the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting portion is adjacent to at least the pivot groove in the extending portion, and the rotation A game machine C4 that is abutted from the axial direction of the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion abut in the direction in which the axial support groove is adjacent to each other. It is possible to easily align the lid and the wall in the direction in which the pivot groove is adjacent.

  Further, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion. The rigidity of the part can be reinforced by the lid member.

  In any one of gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the respective axial centers of the pair of wall portions and the adjacent pair of reflecting members is closed by the main body portion of the pair of reflecting members The game machine C5, characterized in that in the closed state, the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axial centers of the pair of adjacent reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members Since it can be closed by the main part of the light source, it is possible to shield the light emitted from the light source with a plurality of reflecting members.

  Further, in the closed state, the surfaces in the rotational direction of the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other, so that the gap formed between the main body portions of the adjacent reflecting members can be closed. Light leakage can be suppressed.

  Here, the suppression of the light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-like shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light irradiated to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can view the entire light emitted. However, while the shutter member is slidingly moved from the state where the shutter member is disposed between the light irradiated to the player and the player, it is not possible to visually recognize the light overlapping the shutter member. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light is extended.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflective member suppresses light leakage in the closed state, and allows the light irradiated to the player to pass through by the reflective member rotating from the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflective members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above by way of example. That is, each reflective member can be formed in a smaller size as compared to the shutter member. Therefore, as compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the time when the player visually recognizes the entire light can be shortened when the reflective member is rotated.

  Further, since the end portions of the reflection surface portions of the adjacent reflection members are formed so as to be in contact with each other, the positional deviation of the reflection members can be corrected by another reflection member. Therefore, even if there is a reflective member with a low accuracy of the rotation angle among the plurality of reflective members, the posture of the reflective member after rotation is corrected by being in contact with another reflective member. Therefore, the quality of the effect of the reflection member can be secured.

  In the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member is characterized in that the contact portions of the surfaces facing each other are chamfered.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the contact portions of the surfaces facing each other of the reflection member are chamfered, so that the reflection member can be further inclined toward the adjacent reflection member. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflective members in the closed state can be made more flat. In this case, for example, when the pattern is formed by combining the side surfaces in the rotational direction of the plurality of reflective members, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the pattern at the boundary of the reflective members.

  In addition, as the method of chamfering, the method (Affixing R) to a curved surface, the method of cutting with a flat surface, etc. are illustrated.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the game machine comprises a drive device for generating a driving force for rotating the plurality of reflecting members, and a transmission member slidably moved by the drive device, the transmission member being the rotation The plurality of reflective members are formed to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and the plurality of reflecting members contact the transmission portion to be in contact with the transmission member in at least one of the pair of rotation shaft portions. A game machine C7, characterized in that the transmission portion and the reflection member are rotatably formed by sliding the transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the drive device is formed to slide in the vertical direction with respect to the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion The transmission portions respectively formed on the rotation shaft portions of the plurality of reflection members are brought into contact with the transmission member. Here, by sliding the transmission member, the transmission portion is rotated and the reflection member is rotated in conjunction with it. Therefore, the plurality of reflection members can be rotated by the slide movement of one transmission member. .

  In addition, a belt and a rack gear are illustrated as a transmission member. When the transmission member is a belt, a cylindrical portion is illustrated as the transmission portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, a rotational gear shaped portion is illustrated as the transmission portion.

  In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion in which teeth are engraved on a side surface facing the transmission portion, and the transmission portion is formed with teeth capable of meshing in the rack gear portion. A game machine C8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes the rack gear portion, and the teeth formed in the rack gear portion of the transmission member so as to be meshable are formed in the transmission portion. Thereby, when the transmission member is slid, the receiving portions of the plurality of reflecting members meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, thereby preventing slippage between the transmission member and the reflecting member. Can. Thus, the plurality of reflecting members can be synchronously rotated.

  In the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the receiving portion of the transmitting member is formed with a width larger than the distance between adjacent teeth of the receiving portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A game machine C9 characterized in that expansion teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the receiving portion of the transmitting member is greater than the distance between adjacent teeth of the receiving portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. Since the expansion teeth formed with a large width are formed, when the expansion teeth are engaged, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmission portion can be temporarily increased.

  Thereby, the slide movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even if the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member becomes abnormal, it is possible to prevent over-rotation of the reflection member rotated by the transmission member.

<An example of the technical idea of moving the other member by its own drive device>
An inner surface which is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and is reciprocably slidably movable outward and inward of the display region of the liquid crystal display device and is formed in the movement direction in the inward of the display region. And a driving device for driving the pair of moving members, wherein the movable range of one of the pair of moving members is movable. Interferes with the movable range of the other moving member that is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, and abuts on the other moving member by moving the one moving member, and further By moving one moving member in the same direction, the other moving member is pushed forward to be movable. A game machine D1.

  Here, the gaming machine moves the pair of prizes from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display toward the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display and abuts on each other, thereby making the liquid crystal display invisible. Are known (see, for example, JP-A-2005-040413). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the operation of a pair of prizes is monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, one moving member is in contact with the other moving member, and the other moving member is formed to be movable by moving the one moving member. It is possible to create unexpected motions that are difficult to form only with the drive that drives the moving member.

  For example, when the moving member is driven by a single drive, a delay associated with the deceleration time occurs when the driving direction is reversed, which causes the monotony of the moving member. Then, according to the drive direction of the drive device of one moving member being changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction. As a result, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving one moving member, and the time required for changing the direction of one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form only by the drive device that drives the other moving member.

  In addition, since the pair of moving members can be moved even if the driving device for driving the pair of moving members is not synchronized, the power consumption of the driving device can be suppressed and the control load on the driving device can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially vertical direction.

  Here, when one moving member moves downward from the retracted position, the one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, the driving force required when one moving member changes its direction is increased by gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member at the time of changing the direction of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in a substantially vertical direction. When changing the direction of the member, the other moving member moving upward from the retracted position is brought into contact with one of the moving members, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction to change the direction of one moving member The period of time required for The substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction, and means a direction in which some horizontal component is allowed.

  In the gaming machine D1, a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially horizontal direction.

  When one moving member is in contact with the other moving member in the process of moving, and the other moving member is moved by moving the one moving member in the same direction, the drive device of the one moving member is a pair of Since the moving members are moved together, the load on the drive device is increased.

  Here, when the pair of moving members are vertically disposed, the load on the driving device for driving the moving members disposed below is the load on the driving device for driving the moving members disposed above. As a result, the life of the drive device becomes different. Therefore, the replacement cycle of one drive device becomes shorter compared to the other drive device, and the schedule for maintenance becomes more difficult as compared with the case where the pair of drive devices are replaced simultaneously.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to slide in a substantially horizontal direction, thereby reducing the difference in load on the pair of driving devices. be able to.

  That is, when the moving member is formed to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member is not subjected to the force of gravity in the movable direction, and therefore the load on the drive device does not depend on the direction of movement. Therefore, the replacement time of each drive can be matched.

  Note that the direction of sliding movement of the moving member does not have to coincide with the horizontal direction, and inclination from the horizontal direction to the extent that the moving member can stand due to frictional force with the drive device is allowed.

  One of the game machines D1 to D3 includes a base member on which the moving member is disposed, and a shaft for guiding the moving member slidably is fixed to the base member. Game machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft fixed to the base member. In addition, the shaft has a role of slidably guiding the moving member.

  As a result, the shaft can be used both as a member for guiding the movable member slidably and a member for improving the rigidity of the base member.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a carriage that is disposed in a manner to sandwich the shaft and has at least one pair of wheel portions formed rollably with respect to the shaft at both ends, the carriage being A game machine D5 fixed to at least one end of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the carriage portion is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the carriage portion has the wheel portion that can roll on the shaft, thereby suppressing the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides. can do.

  Moreover, since a wheel part is arrange | positioned in the aspect which pinches a shaft, and they are arrange | positioned by the at least both ends of a trolley | bogie part, the attitude | position with a shaft and a trolley | bogie part can be maintained uniformly.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively disposed on the pair of moving members are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the wheel portions respectively disposed on the pair of moving members abut each other when the pair of moving members abut. As a result, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be increased when the pair of moving members abut, so that the impact when the pair of moving members abut can be alleviated.

  In addition, you may form a pair of wheel part contact | abutted mutually in a mutually different diameter. In this case, by interposing the small diameter wheel portion between the large diameter wheel portion and the shaft, resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmitting portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted, and is formed elongated in a direction perpendicular to the axial center direction of the shaft, and one of the moving members in the longitudinal direction A game machine D7 characterized in that the transmission unit and the carriage unit are disposed at an end portion of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the transmission portion to which the driving force of the drive device is transmitted is formed at one end of the carriage portion. The carriage portion is guided by the shaft and slides, so that the engagement relationship between the transmission portion and the drive device can be optimized.

  That is, since the moving member is formed to be long, it is likely to be bent, and the bending is generated with one end where the carriage guided by the shaft is disposed as a fulcrum. When the transmission part is formed at the other end which is the end opposite to the one end of the bogie part, the position of the transmission part is easily changed due to the bending of the moving member, and the movement The engagement between the transmission part of the member and the drive device is likely to deviate. If a shift occurs in the engagement relationship between the transmission part of the moving member and the drive device, the resistance generated between the transmission part and the drive device at the time of sliding movement of the movement member becomes large, which is a problem.

  On the other hand, if the transmission part is formed at one end where the carriage part is disposed, the transmission position of the driving force and the supporting position of the moving member are both formed at one end, and the moving member is Even if it bends, it does not change the position of the transmission part of the moving member. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission portion of the moving member and the drive device can be maintained, and the resistance generated between the transmission portion and the drive device can be suppressed when the moving member slides.

  In addition, as an aspect of a transmission part, when the rotation gear is formed from the drive device side, for example, the rack gear part formed in one edge part is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission unit side.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the displacement due to the bending of the moving members in the calculation of the abutting positions of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

  In the gaming machine D7, a contact of the pair of moving members occurs at an end opposite to the transmission unit side.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end opposite to the transmitting portion side, so the transmitting portion is in the case where the pair of moving members are in contact It can mitigate the impact that the side receives. Thereby, the load which a drive device receives can be reduced because a pair of moving members contact | abut.

  In the gaming machines D7 to D9, the movable member is extended in parallel with the sliding direction, and the other end, which is the opposite end of the one end of the movable member, is the shaft rod. A guide wall which is abutted from a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft, and the movable member is rotatably supported at the other end and a pair of abuts to the guide wall A game machine D10 comprising a rotating body, the pair of rotating bodies being juxtaposed in the sliding direction of the moving member, and being rotated as the moving member is slidingly moved.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall is extended in parallel with the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member The pair of rotating bodies abut on the guide wall.

  Here, when the moving member suddenly stops or the like and the moving member largely bends and vibrates with one end as a fulcrum, the moving member of the pair of rotating members pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member The rotating body on the opposite side of the direction of deflection of the is pressed against the guide wall. Therefore, since resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of the flexural vibration of the moving member, the flexural vibration of the moving member can be easily suppressed as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed by the free end. .

  Moreover, since the rotating body and the guide wall smoothly contact each other at the time of starting the moving member, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance generated between the guide wall and the moving member at the time of starting the moving member.

  In addition, as an aspect of the contact between the guide wall portion and the rotating body, a rack gear is formed on the guide wall portion, and a mode in which a gear engaged with the rack gear of the guide wall portion is engraved on the side surface of the rotating body Be done.

  In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes gear-like tooth portions engraved on a side surface, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion engaged with the tooth portions. .

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, teeth are formed on the side surfaces of the rotating body, and a rack gear that is engaged with the teeth is formed on the guide wall. Accordingly, the contact area between the guide wall and the rotating body can be increased, and the bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11, a gaming machine provided with a detection device capable of detecting the position and velocity of the pair of moving members, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined by the detection result of the detection device. D12.

  Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by the electric motor, the instability of the voltage of the electric motor may make the speed of the moving member unstable. This may cause the pair of moving members to collide at an unexpected speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the gaming machine D12 is provided with a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members. Since the moving speeds of the pair of moving members are determined, the pair of moving members can be prevented from colliding at an unexpected relative speed and being broken.

  For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted according to the detection result of the detecting device capable of detecting the position and the velocity of one moving member in a state where the pair of moving members are close to each other. An equal velocity state can be formed. Thereby, the impact at the time of the collision of a pair of moving members can be relieved.

<Feature E group> (retracts attention from the V positive attacker during V positive operation)
The lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information for indicating that the display means is the predetermined lottery result In the gaming machine, the variable winning means has a variable winning means that can change from a closed state in which the game ball does not easily enter the ball to an open state in which the ball is easy to enter based on the displayed. Opening / closing means for opening / closing a specific area where the game ball entering the variable winning means can enter the ball based on the establishment of the above, and ball entering detection means for detecting that the game ball has entered the particular area; A bonus state giving means for giving a bonus state advantageous to the player based on detection of the game ball by the entering detection means, and at least when the opening / closing means is operated, Real production to produce Gaming machine E1, characterized in that those having a means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. Based on the fact that identification information indicating a predetermined lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the state from the closed state where the game ball is hard to enter into the open state to the easy entering of ball. In the variable winning means, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the game ball entering the variable winning means is opened and closed by the opening and closing means in a specific area where the game ball can enter. Then, based on the fact that the ball entering the game ball is detected in the specific area by the ball entering detection means, the bonus state giving means is provided with a bonus state that is advantageous to the player. Further, when at least the opening and closing means is operated, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect executing means. Thereby, the operation of the opening and closing means can be made inconspicuous by the predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, a gaming machine E2 characterized in that the effect executing means causes the display means to display a specific display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the display means displays a specific display mode by the effect executing means, so that the player can be diverted from the opening / closing means.

  In the game machine E1 or E2, the effect execution means notifies a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as the effect.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, a notification mode indicating holding of the hand to the front side of the variable winning means as the effect is notified by the effect executing means. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to distinguish the action.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the effect execution means is executed at least over a period operated from a predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, at least the effect executing means is executed over a period operated from a predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to notice the operation of the opening / closing means.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means includes an opening through which game balls can enter, and the opening part into the closed state, the game balls entering the difficult state and the open state entering the balls. The opening / closing means has a short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, and the opening / closing means A game machine E5 characterized in that one of the long opening time and the long opening time necessary for the game ball to flow down to the specific area is executed based on a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable winning means is provided with an opening through which the game ball can enter and a restriction member that changes the opening into a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game can enter. And either the short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area or the long open time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area The opening / closing means is executed based on one of the conditions. Thereby, it can be controlled with an easy configuration whether or not the game ball is made to enter the opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine E5, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable winning means to the open state based on being drawn by the drawing means as the specific drawing result, and the drawing means And the type determination means for determining the type of the special game when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and the opening / closing means is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determination means. A game machine E6 characterized in that either the short opening time or the long opening time is determined.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a special game in which the special game execution means changes the variable winning means to the open state is executed based on the lottery being a specific lottery result by the lottery means, the type determination means The type is determined. Then, in the opening / closing means, one of the short opening time and the long opening time is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. Thereby, the privilege to be given to the player can be easily varied depending on the type of the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a fair game.

<Feature F group> (One attacker forms a V sure route)
The lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information for indicating that the display means is the specific lottery result When it is displayed, variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which the game ball hardly enters the ball to an open state in which the ball easily enters the ball, and a probability that the lottery means will draw the predetermined lottery result is a normal time In a gaming machine having probability setting means for setting one of a normal probability and a special probability that is higher than the normal probability, the variable winning means enters the ball when the gaming ball is in the open state. A second specific area which is different from the first specific area where the opening which is made possible, the game ball which entered the opening can pass, and the first specific area, the first specific area and the second specific One of the areas and the above The sorting means for sorting the game ball having entered the mouth, and the probability setting means sets the special probability on condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area A game machine F1 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. When identification information indicating that a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball to an open state where it is easy to enter the ball. Then, the probability setting means sets the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery result by the lottery means to one of the ordinary probability at the normal time and the special probability which is a probability higher than the ordinary probability. In the variable winning means, the game ball is distributed by the distributing means to either one of the first specific area which is opened and can pass the game ball entered into the opening and the second specific area different from the first specific area. Is distributed. Further, in the probability setting means, the special probability is set on condition that the gaming ball has passed through the first specific area. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the special probability is set by the variable winning means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine F1, based on the fact that the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, a special game which makes it easy to change the variable winning means to the open state until a predetermined condition is established. The special game execution means to be executed, and the type determination means for determining the type of the special game to be executed by the special game execution means when the specific lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means in one of the first state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the first specific area and the second state in which the game ball is easily allocated to the second specific area A game machine F2 characterized by comprising: distribution setting means set within a period of the special game of the first one.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, the special game execution means is executed to make the variable winning means be easily changed to the open state until the predetermined condition is established. Ru. Then, when the specific lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, the type of the special game to be executed by the special game execution means is determined by the type determination means. In addition, one of the first state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first specific area and the second state in which game balls are easily allocated to the second specific area is based on the type of special game determined by the type determination means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of 1 special game. Thus, the sorting means can be controlled by the type of the special game determined by the type determining means, so that the control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that control of a game can be performed more simply.

  In the gaming machine F1, the sorting setting means sets a first time shorter than a time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening as the second state from the open state, A game machine F3 characterized in that a second time which is longer than a time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening is set as the first state from the open state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, in the sorting setting means, the first time, which is shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is the second state The second time which is set from the open state and which is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening is set from the open state as the first state. This makes it possible to easily control whether to set the special probability. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is variably changed to the open state a plurality of times when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, and the distributing means is A game machine F4 operated for a certain period of time in a state of distributing gaming balls to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the variable winning means, when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed, the variable winning means is varied into an open state a plurality of times. The distributing means is operated for a certain period of time in a state of distributing the gaming balls to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the game ball to be distributed to the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the gaming machine has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on passage of the gaming balls through the first specific area or the second specific area. A game machine F5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player based on the passage of the gaming ball through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since the money is paid out by the payout means, the player can be more interested in the game.

<Feature G group> (long press effect)
Based on establishment of lottery conditions, lottery means for performing a lottery, effect execution means for performing an effect based on a lottery result by the lottery means, operation means that the player can operate, and the operation A signal output unit that outputs an operation signal based on the operation of the unit; a determination unit that determines whether the operation signal output by the signal output unit is received; and the operation signal is output by the determination unit It is characterized by further comprising: effect variable means for changing the effect to be executed by the effect execution means based on the release timing at which it is determined that the operation signal has not been received after being determined to have been received. A gaming machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the lottery result of the lottery means to be executed based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Further, based on the operation of the player by the operation means, after the operation signal outputted by the signal output means is judged by the judgment means as having received the operation signal, it is judged that the operation signal is not received. Based on the release timing, the effect executed by the effect executing means is varied by the effect varying means. As a result, the effect can be varied in various ways by the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the effect variable means determines whether the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, and if within the allowable period, it is more than when it is outside the allowable period. A game machine G2 characterized in that it is variable to an effect that is advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, in the effect variable means, when it is determined that the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, it is more than when it is outside the allowable period. Since the effect can be varied to the player's advantage, the player can be made interested by operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, when it is determined that the operation signal is received by the determining means, the gaming machine G3 has a notifying means for notifying the timing of the allowable period. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, when it is determined that the operation signal is received by the determination means, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notification means, so There is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

  In the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notification means notifies that the allowable period is a special notification mode that is easier to identify than other lottery results. The game machine G4 which features.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, in the notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the special notification mode in which the allowable period is easier to identify than the other lottery results. Since the notification is made by the player, the player can play the game by predicting the lottery result in the notification mode.

  In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the effect variable means receives the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal is continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the reception of the operation signal. A game machine G5 characterized in that the effect is made variable when it disappears.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, in the effect variable means, the determination means continuously receives the operation signal for a predetermined period or more after receiving the operation signal. When it is determined that the operation signal is not received after that, the effect is changed, so that the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed more.

<Feature H group> (SW production)
Based on the display means for displaying the effect of the game, the operation means operable by the player, the operation determining means for determining that the operation means is operated, and the effect based on the determination result by the operation determining means Based on the fact that the effect changing means for changing the effect, the effect setting means for setting the effect contents to be changed by the effect changing means according to the timing of operating the operation means, and the player are advantageously operated. A period setting means for setting at least a first period in which the effect content is set and a second period in which the effect content which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set, the first period and the first period At least the same as the first notification mode notifying in a discriminable manner from the two periods and the second notification aspect notifying in a distinguishable manner between the first period and the second period in the different notification modes. Period Gaming machine H1, characterized in that the informing means for informing, and has a.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determination means, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is varied by the effect variable means. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means, the effect setting means changes the effect content that is varied by the effect variable means. Then, based on the fact that the operation means is operated, the first period in which the effect content advantageous to the player is set, and the second period in which the effect content which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set Are set by at least the period setting means. A second notification mode in which the first period and the second period are differentially reported in a notification mode different from the first notification mode in which the first period and the second period are distinguishably distinguishable from the first notification mode Are notified by the notification means at least in the same period. Thus, the player can easily play the game by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within an effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effective.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of first periods within the effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. It is easy to configure.

  In the gaming machine H2, a gaming machine characterized in that the first notification mode is to change symbols for transition of a period according to a predetermined rule, and to display the current period set. H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed with the symbol being changed according to a predetermined rule, and the current period set is notified Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, a gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second notification mode is configured to make a symbol change and notify a transition of a period based on a rule set at random.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is notified by being changed based on the rule set at random, so Has the effect of being able to provide a wide variety of

<Feature I group> (overflow control)
An information acquisition means for acquiring information based on a ball entrance where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the ball entrance, and based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for lottery with the establishment of lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the game, a memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquiring means until the lottery condition is established, and the ball entrance The first game ball is easy to enter The ball entering variable means, which is variable in the second state which makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and the ball entering variable means is set to be easily changed in the first state than in the normal state. In the gaming machine, the state setting means sets the special state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, wherein the dynamic display mode determining means is configured to select the information based on the number of the information stored in the storage means. The dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed, and when the special state is set, at least the information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than a predetermined number. In this case, the gaming machine I1 is characterized by having delay means for delaying the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the ball entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed in response to the establishment of the lottery condition. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Next, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit up to a predetermined number until the lottery condition is established. In addition, the ball entry variable means changes the first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball into the ball entry port and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. Then, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the special state that is more easily changed to the first state than the normal state at the normal time is set by the state setting means. Furthermore, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily varied based on the number of information stored in the storage means, and the special state is determined. If it is set and at least the information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the delay means delays the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period. As a result, since the delay is delayed by the delay means, the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where a large amount of information is stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a set number, the dynamic display mode determining means sets a dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display period to the set number. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that it is easier to determine than when stored in large numbers.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determining means stores more than the set number when the number of information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the set number. Since it is easier to determine a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display period than in the case of the above-described case, it is possible to set a short period in which the dynamic display is not performed.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the delay means is for delaying a period longer than a period during which the ball entry variable means is varied from the second state to the first state. .

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a longer period than the period in which the ball entry variable means changes from the second state to the first state. The dynamic display period can be determined with a large amount of information stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the ball entering variable means is changed to the first state, a period during which the game information of the predetermined number or less for which the information is stored in the memory means can be entered A gaming machine I4 characterized by being maintained in the first state below.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, in the ball entering variable means, when being changed to the first state, a predetermined number or less of the games are stored Since the ball is maintained in the first state within the period in which the ball can enter the ball, there is an effect that the game can be played more efficiently.

<Feature J group> (Sway fluctuation hidden)
Lottery means for executing a lottery, display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamic display, and a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means In the gaming machine, the identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means The display mode includes a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped after being temporarily stopped as the dynamic display of one lottery result, and the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode In when said identification symbols is temporarily stopped, the gaming machine is characterized in that with a stationary symbol display means for displaying overlapping the stationary pattern to the front side of the identification symbols J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Then, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game which is advantageous to the player. The identification information indicates the result of the lottery by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols. In addition, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, as the dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily displayed again after being temporarily stopped In the case where the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode, the still symbol is displayed superimposed on the front side of the identification symbol by the static symbol display means. This makes it possible to make it look as if the temporarily stopped identification symbol has been decidedly stopped by the static symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with various effects.

  In the game machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed, so that the temporary stopping is performed. There is an effect that it can be reported intelligibly.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is again hidden before the identification symbol starts dynamic display. A game machine J3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol and is hidden before the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be easily configured to see the identification symbol.

  In any one of the game machines J1 to J3, a game machine J4 characterized in that the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of 1 based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the pseudo continuous display mode is A gaming machine J5 characterized by being set so as to be easily determined when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the dynamic display mode determination means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the lottery result by the lottery means. And, in the pseudo continuous display mode, since it is set so that it is easy to be determined when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, it is possible to make the player expect the specific lottery result in the pseudo continuous display mode effective.

<Characteristic K group> (Puden gets higher if the attackers are squeezed with the same winning rate for the Puden chucker and the attacker)
A ball entry variable means that can be changed into a ball entry where the game can enter and a second state in which the game ball can easily enter the ball into the first state and the second state where it is harder to enter than the first state. And acquiring means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the gaming ball at the entrance, and lottery means for executing a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the lottery means In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on being determined to be a specific lottery result, an opening where the gaming ball can enter And an opening variable means for changing the opening into an open state where the game ball can enter the ball and a difficult closed state, and the bonus game execution means sets the variable means in the open state. The period is variable, and the opening and the ball inlet are When the opening is in the closed state and the entrance is in the first state, gaming balls entering the opening are disposed at positions where it is easy to enter the entrance. A game machine K1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the information of the acquiring means acquired based on the game ball having entered the ball entrance. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that the result is a specific lottery result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. The ball entry variable means changes the first state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter the ball at the entrance and the second state in which the ball is harder to enter than the first state. The opening is made variable by the opening variable means for changing the opening state where the gaming ball can enter and the difficult closing state, and in the bonus game executing means, the variable means is made variable in the opening state for a predetermined period. Furthermore, when the opening is closed and the opening is in the first state, it is easy for the game ball entering the opening to enter the opening. It is arranged in the position respectively. Thereby, it is possible to play the game efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is constituted by a wall member capable of opening and closing the opening, and in the closed state, the game ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and played toward the ball entrance side A game machine K2 characterized in that it is configured to guide a ball.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is constituted by the wall member capable of opening and closing the opening, and in the closed state, the gaming ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member Since the game ball is induced to the mouth side, the game ball can be easily entered and configured, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  A gaming machine K3 characterized in that in the gaming machine K2, guiding means for guiding the gaming ball from the storage wall member to the ball entrance are provided.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be made to enter the ball entrance more efficiently.

In any one of gaming machines K1 to K3, a launching means for launching the gaming ball to the gaming area;
And a launch force adjustment means capable of adjusting the launch force of the game ball launched by the launch means based on the operation of the player, wherein the game area is launched by the launch means. Is formed at least a first area where the liquid can flow down and a second area different from the first area, and the opening is a position where the game ball which has flowed down the second area can enter And the ball entry port is disposed at a position where the game balls which have flowed down either of the first area and the second area can commonly enter. Game machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines K1 to K3, the state of entering the ball can be changed by the launch force adjusting means, and the effect of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K4, a special ball entry port where the game ball having flowed down the second area can enter and a bonus giving a benefit advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the special ball entrance. Means and the gaming ball which has flowed down the second area is easily guided to the opening, and is not guided to the special entrance, and is difficult to be guided to the opening, to the special entrance A game machine K5 having setting means which can be set to either of the second setting state which is easy to be guided.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K4, the state of the gaming can be varied, and there is an effect that a game having a fresh taste can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine K5, the setting means is configured to be able to set from the outside of the gaming machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, the setting can be varied by the setting means, and there is an effect that the taste of the game can be adjusted.

  In any one of the game machines K4 to K5, the game ball having flowed down the second area is easily guided to the opening, and it is difficult to be guided to the opening with the first adjustment state which is difficult to be guided to the entrance side. A game machine K7 having adjustment means capable of being adjusted to the second adjustment state where it is easy to be guided to the entrance side. According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K4 to K5, there is an effect that it is possible to adjust the prosperity of the game by adjusting by the adjusting means.

<Feature L group> (loop twice with V attacker)
The first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the second ball entering means capable of changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the ball is easy to enter, and the first ball entering The second ball entering means is a second judging means based on a first judging means for judging based on the game ball entering the means and that the judgment result of the first judging means is a first judgment result. The special state setting means for setting the special state that is easily changed to the state, the second determination means for making the determination based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the second ball entry means, and the determination result of the second determination means In the case of the second determination result, the third ball entering means capable of entering the ball, the specific area through which the game ball entered into the third ball entering means can pass, and the game ball passes through the specific area A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the information, and the special state setting means Whether the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the right storage means capable of storing at least two rights to be judged by the second judgment means and the judgment result of the second judgment means A game machine L1 characterized by having a decision means for deciding whether or not it is.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known which display various effect images such as variation effects on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball is won (start start winning) at the start opening, and, for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. displayed on the square of × 3 are variably displayed, and when the fluctuation display is stopped, the symbols etc. which are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given to the player.

  In such gaming machines, there are many that have a probability variation function (probability variation) in which the probability that a predetermined gaming value such as a jackpot is awarded is increased by satisfying a predetermined condition, and there is a rush in certainty once Then, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880) to improve the interest of the game.

  However, the above-mentioned gaming machine is only novel when it hits twice once if it enters into a definite change, and other gaming properties are the same as conventional gaming machines, and further improvement of interest in gaming is required. The

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the first determination means selects a predetermined first determination result to provide a special state in which the determination by the second determination means is easily received, and further, the second determination means After the predetermined second judgment result is selected by the game, the judgment by the second judgment means is executed after having the game characteristics rich in interest that the jackpot is given for the first time by passing the game ball to the specific area By storing the right to perform, it is possible to execute the determination by the stored second determining means even if the special state is once shifted to the normal state. Therefore, when the gaming state is far from the jackpot (transition from the special state to the normal state), the player can enjoy while expecting the jackpot until the end by giving the jackpot chance at least once more, There is an effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, the second entering means is disposed on the upstream side of the third entering means, and at least a part of a period during which the game ball can enter the third entering means. A gaming machine L2 characterized by being variably set to the first state.

  In the gaming machine L1 described above, in the special state, in order to reliably perform the determination by the second determination means, control is performed to bring the second ball entering means into the second state where it is easy to enter the ball. The problem that the ball entering the third ball entering means is blocked by the second ball entering means in the state has emerged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1, the second ball entering means is brought into the closed state (retracted state) during the period when the third ball entering means can enter the ball. The effect of being able to be performed smoothly without blocking the ball entry to the third ball entry means is exhibited.

  In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entering means to the second state, and a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means Means and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, the dynamic display period determination means having the special state set The game machine L3 is characterized in that the dynamic display period shorter than normal is set so as to be easily determined until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine L2 described above has made it possible to smoothly enter the gaming ball into the third entering means, but in addition to that in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, the second special during the special state The configuration for securing the reserved memory of the design had to be achieved at the same time.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine L3, the dynamic display period for changing the second ball entry means to the second state is set to be shorter in the special state than in the normal state.

  By this control, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L2, predetermined conditions (for example, the opening of the third ball entry means, the passage of a predetermined time, the entering of a predetermined number of balls into the second ball entry means, reaching of upper limit storage etc.) It is possible to prioritize the entry of the gaming ball to the second entry means until the establishment of the second entry means, and to prioritize the entry of the game ball to the third entry means after the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, it is effective in the ability to play a game smoothly.

  In the gaming machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entering means to the second state, and a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means Means, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, A variable control means for changing the second ball entering means to the second state when the identification information indicating the determination result to be changed to the second state is displayed; A gaming machine L4 characterized in that the second ball entering means is varied to the second state for a longer period than usual until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the setting of the special state.

  In addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine L4 has a control for varying the second ball entry means as the second state for a long period of time until a predetermined condition is established, and the above-mentioned gaming machine The same effect as that of the machine L3 can be achieved.

  A gaming machine L5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine L3 or L4, the predetermined condition is established before the third ball entering means can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, it is possible to reliably establish the predetermined condition before the third ball entry means can enter the ball. It is possible to smoothly enter the means.

  In any one of the gaming machines L3 to L5, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means And second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, wherein the second dynamic display period determination means determines at least the first time after the special state is set. A game machine L6 characterized in that a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means is set for the dynamic display of the above.

  With the above-described gaming machine L5, smooth gaming has become possible for entering the third entering means. However, in the gaming machine of the present technical concept, at least two rights to be judged by the second judging means can be stored in the game in the special state, but the judgment of each judging means in the special state Depending on the timing, a new problem has arisen that at least two rights to be determined by the second determination means can not be stored. That is, if a big hit based on the determination result of the second determination means is provided before the second ball entering means is set to the second state as the determination result of the third determination means in the special state, the special game The second entering means ends before the second state is reached, and the problem arises that the right to be determined by the second determining means can not be stored anew.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, at least the first second dynamic display (the first time the special game (time reduction game) is started) (2) In order to set the period of variation display of special symbol longer than the dynamic display (variation display of normal symbol) time, dynamic display is finished by the end of the first second dynamic display, and the second 2 ball entering means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned new problems and to secure the distinctive game characteristics possessed by the gaming machine of the present technical concept.

  In the game machines L1 to L6, the third ball entering means is characterized in that the game balls pass through the specific area when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects of playing from the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming for the third entering means until the predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from waking up immediately after the third entering means is finished, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7, the third ball entering means is a ball passing through the specific area when the predetermined number or more of game balls enter the ball in the state 1 where the ball can enter. A game machine L8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of playing from the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming for the third entering means until entering a predetermined number or more of game balls. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from waking up immediately after the third entering means is finished, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball entering means is a means for restricting passage of the game ball to the specific area, and the predetermined number of game balls enter to control the restriction means. A gaming machine L9 comprising: variable means for changing to a release state in which the gaming ball can pass to the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball entering means does not pass through the specific area until the number of gaming balls entering the third ball entering means reaches a predetermined number. It is possible to prevent the player from being upset immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a variable member that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which the game ball enters the specific area. Based on the variable control means for changing the variable member and the fact that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific determination result, it is possible to enter the third ball entering means, and the first determination means When it is determined that the determination result is the specific determination result, the variable control means controls the variable member to change to the restricted state for a period during which the third ball entering means can enter the ball. When it is determined that the second determination result is the second determination result by the second determination means, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period during which the game ball can enter the specific area. Is Gaming machine L10 characterized and.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, it is possible to enter the third ball entering means even when the specific determination result is obtained by the first determining means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the third entering means is made to enter with any of the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L10, the determining means determines whether to set the special state by the special state setting means based on the second determination result. A game machine L11 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, it is determined whether or not the special state is to be set when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. In order to allow the player to enter the third ball entry means, it is possible for the player to have an expectation of the previous game by grasping that there is a possibility of being in a special state. The interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines any of the second determination result or the determination result in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means for all determinations. A gaming machine L12 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state in which the determination by the second determination means is performed itself is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine can be provided.

  A gaming machine L13 according to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, wherein the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game even on the basis of the first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L12, even with the first determination result, it is possible to provide a fun gaming machine because a bonus game is executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the bonus game executing means is configured to cause the game ball to enter the fourth ball entering means different from the third ball entering means as the bonus game. Characterized game machine L14.

  According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the game is directed to four ball entering means In order to play a game that shoots a ball, it is possible to provide an entertaining gaming machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball entering means is a ball entering portion where the game ball can enter the ball, and a guiding position where the game ball can be guided to enter the ball into the ball entering portion A gaming machine L15 having a guiding member that can be changed to a non-inductive position where it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the ball entry portion.

  In order to take advantage of the playability of the gaming machine of the present technical concept, there is a problem that in the second ball entry means, it is difficult to enter the first state in the first state and to easily enter the second state.

  According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball entry means is provided with a guiding member, and the guiding member can be varied between the guiding position and the non-guiding position By doing this, the first state is difficult to enter, and the second state is easy to enter, so that it is possible to take advantage of the playability of this gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine L15, the induction member includes a first area capable of receiving falling game balls, and a second area in which the game balls rolling from the first area can roll to the ball entry portion. , And the gaming ball rolled to the second area is configured to be capable of entering the ball entry portion, and a gaming machine L16.

  According to the gaming machine L16, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L15, the guiding member is constituted by the first area and the second area, and the guiding member can enter the ball from the second area. Even if the ball entry portion is provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball falling from the game board to enter the ball in the non-induction position, the ball entry into the ball entry portion in the induction position There is an effect that it can be made easy and the playability of this gaming machine can be utilized.

  In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the guiding member is in the second state for a period longer than a rolling period required for the gaming ball received in the first area to enter the ball entering portion. The gaming machine L17 is characterized in that when the special state is not set, the second state is changed in a period shorter than the rolling period.

  According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L16, when the special state is set, the game ball on the guiding member enters the ball when the period for changing the guiding member from the non-induction position to the induction position is set. It is possible to set a period when it is easy to enter the ball and a period when it is difficult for the game ball on the guiding member to enter the ball when the special state is not set, so There is an effect that it is possible to take advantage of the gameplay.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the second identification by the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a benefit from the determination result of the second determination means becoming the second determination result until the bonus game is performed A bonus pre-game execution means for executing a pre-game, and the second dynamic display period determination means is configured to determine the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result And the sum of the length of the bonus pre-game period is determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result It is A game machine L18 characterized by

  In the gaming machine of the present technical concept, when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, the jackpot game is not provided immediately but the jackpot game is provided only after passing through the specific area. . In such a gaming machine, when dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, there is a problem that the player wants to have expectation as close to as possible when a big hit game is provided. Surfaced. That is, when all the determination results of the second determination means are displayed at the same timing, the determination results of the second determination means are the determination results of the second determination means before the bonus pre-game is executed based on the second determination results. There is a problem that the player recognizes the game, and the amusement of the game property becomes scarce while the bonus pre-game is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result The total length of the game period, that is, the period from when the dynamic display based on the second determination result is started to when the jackpot game is provided, and the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result The length of the dynamic display period when it is a predetermined determination result other than the above, that is, the period from the start to the end of the dynamic display based on the determination result (other than the second determination result) of the second determination means By making the same, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the determination result of the second determination means until the timing before the bonus pre-game ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The second bonus game execution means executes a second bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means being the first determination result, and the predetermined determination result is A game machine L19 characterized in that the judgment result of the second judgment means is the judgment result that the second bonus game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L18, the display of the jackpot based on the determination by the second determination means can be made the same timing, and the player can enjoy the dynamic display to the end It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by differentiating the award given to the player between the jackpot based on the second determination result and the jackpot based on the predetermined determination result.

  The gaming machine L19 includes effect executing means for executing an effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, and a display body for displaying an effect to be executed by the effect executing means. The effect executing means is for displaying on the display body a second determination result effect corresponding to the second determination result, and a bonus pre-game effect corresponding to the bonus pre-game, and the second bonus game is executed. When the effect corresponding to the determined result is displayed on the display body, at least a part of the second determination result effect is used. A game machine L20.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, effect display based on identification information indicating various determination results is executed using a display body (for example, a liquid crystal device) so that a player can grasp. Then, the player makes a comeback while grasping the contents of the effect display displayed on the display body. Also in the gaming machine of the present technical concept, there is a demand for an effect display suitable for the game property.

  According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L19, a part of the effect display based on the determination result that the bonus game is to be executed based on the determination result that the second benefit game is to be executed By using for effect display, the player can not grasp which special game is to be executed only by a part of the effect content displayed on the display body, and the effect content to be displayed for the player There is an effect that it is possible to make the whole of the game more interesting and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L20, as the second determination result effect, the second determination result dynamically displayed effect corresponding to while the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and the second identification information are determined and displayed. When the effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second bonus game is executed is executed by the effect execution means, A game machine L21 characterized in that at least the second determination result dynamically displayed effect is used.

  According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L20, in the case of executing an effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second bonus game is executed, a part of the second determination result dynamically displayed in the effect By using this, a common effect will be performed for a while after the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is started, and the player can use only the start portion of the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to know if the bonus game is to be executed, and it is possible to give the player an interest in all of the contents of the displayed effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. is there. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using the common effect.

  In the gaming machine L20, the bonus pre-game effect is a bonus pre-game effect during the bonus pre-play period and a bonus game decision effect corresponding to the game ball passing through the specific area And when the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second bonus game is executed, at least the benefit during the bonus game is used for part of the effect. Gaming machine L22.

  According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L20 to L21, in the case of executing effects corresponding to the determination result that the second bonus game is executed, using effects prior to the bonus game for a part thereof Therefore, a common effect is performed in the final stage immediately before the determination result of the second determination means is displayed, and the player can see which bonus game is only in the final stage portion of the effect content displayed on the display body. There is an effect that it is possible to give an interest to all of the presentation contents displayed to the player without grasping whether it is to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using the common effect.

  In the gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect execution means reports that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and the determination result by the second determination means is the first notification effect The second notification effect for notifying that it is the determination result that the second bonus game is executed is to be executed, and the first notification effect or the second notification effect is executed after the effect executing means has executed the effect. A game machine L23 characterized in that the timing of executing the same is the same.

  According to the gaming machine L23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L20 to L22, the timing at which the effect of notifying the determination result of the second determination means is displayed is the same, so the player grasps the determination result at different timings. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent doing so and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, by providing two or all of the configurations from the gaming machines L21 to L23, it is possible to achieve more effective effects.

<Feature M group> (Perform latent presentation during Let's Mambo)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, a determination is performed based on acquisition means for acquiring information, an information storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, and information stored in the information storage means A determination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means based on establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus granting means for granting a bonus which is advantageous to the player when the symbol is displayed; and a prior judging means for judging the information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is established; Specific effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display on the information already stored in the information storage means, based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, and Special With respect to the information determined to execute the specific effect by the effect determination means, the determination means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied and the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied It has a specific effect regulation means for restricting the execution of the specific effect to the information which is stored later and is stored before the information which is the trigger for the execution of the specific effect being decided. A game machine M1 characterized in that

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known which display various effect images such as variation effects on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball is won (start start winning) at the start opening, and, for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. displayed on the square of × 3 are variably displayed, and when the fluctuation display is stopped, the symbols etc. which are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given to the player. In such gaming machines, there are many that have a probability variation function (probability variation) in which the probability that a predetermined gaming value such as a jackpot is awarded is increased by satisfying a predetermined condition, and there is a rush in certainty once Then, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880) to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-described gaming machine only gives the player an interest in the jackpot, and has a problem of reducing the interest of the game for the variable display which is out. Further interest improvement of the game was required.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Based on the establishment of the second condition, identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Before the second condition is established, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the previous determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, it is determined by the specific effect determination means whether or not the specific effect is to be executed by the dynamic display with respect to the information already stored in the information storage means. With respect to the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, it is determined by the determining means whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is stored after the information determined that the predetermined condition is established by the determination means, and the information stored before the information that is the trigger for the execution of the specific effect is determined The execution of the effect is regulated by the specific effect regulation means.

  As a result, the execution of the specific effect is restricted with respect to the information stored after the information for which the predetermined condition is established among the information for which the specific effect is determined, so the specific effect is continuous. After making it think that the effect to be executed is finished, it is possible to execute the specific effect again. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means as one dynamic display mode. Means for determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The game machine M2 which features.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When the dynamic display mode determining unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information to be determined, the determining unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, by displaying the specific dynamic display mode, it is possible to make the player think that the specific effect is finished.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determining means determines execution of the specific effect based on the determination that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the prior determination means. A game machine M3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M2, the execution of the specific effect is a specific effect based on the determination that the specific dynamic display mode is information determined by the prior determination means. Since it is determined by the determination means, the player is made to recognize early that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by any change of the continuous hold when the specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when it is determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, the execution of the specific effect is started with respect to the information already stored. A game machine M4 having start information determination means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be performed by the specific effect determining means, the information already stored is Since the information to start the execution of the specific effect is determined by the start information determining means by a predetermined lottery, the player can be provided various effects by randomly making the number of times the specific effect is continuously executed. It has the effect of

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect restricting means is stored later than the information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect is determined. Among the information stored before the information that has triggered, the information that is stored a predetermined number of times continuously from the information stored next to the information determined that the predetermined condition is met Game machine M5 characterized by restricting the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulation means is stored later than the information determined that the predetermined condition is established by the determination means. In the information stored before the information that triggers the execution of the specific effect, the information stored next to the information determined that the predetermined condition is established is continued for a predetermined number of times Since the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means with respect to the information stored in the memory, the specific effect of the specific number of consecutive times is restricted, and the player can increase the expectation that the specific effect will be executed again. It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine M5, the specific effect regulation means determines the predetermined number by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M5, since the predetermined number of times is determined by the specific regulating means by lottery, the number of times a specific effect is regulated can be made random, thus improving the player's interest It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the dynamic effect with respect to the information whose specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting device is characterized by having a suggested effect execution means for executing a predetermined suggested effect. Game machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the predetermined suggestion effect is suggested on the dynamic display for the information in which the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means. Since execution is performed by the execution means, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player an expectation that a specific effect is continued by the suggested effect.

<Feature N group> (The number of latencies after Let's Mambo is determined by the number of reservations at the start of Let's Mambo execution)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, a determination is performed based on acquisition means for acquiring information, an information storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, and information stored in the information storage means A determination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus that is advantageous to the player when is displayed;
The prior determination means for determining the information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is satisfied, and the information storage means already stored based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means If the effect determining means for determining the execution of the continuous effect that performs the specific effect every time the dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the information being performed, and the effect performing means performs the continuous effect Suggested to the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined opportunity until the end of the determined dynamic display of the information A game machine N1 comprising: suggestion effect determination means for determining whether or not to perform an effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known which display various effect images such as variation effects on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuation effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball is won (start start winning) at the start opening, and, for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. displayed on the square of × 3 are variably displayed, and when the fluctuation display is stopped, the symbols etc. which are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given to the player. In such gaming machines, there are many that have a probability variation function (probability variation) in which the probability that a predetermined gaming value such as a jackpot is awarded is increased by satisfying a predetermined condition, and there is a rush in certainty once Then, a predetermined game value such as a jackpot is given at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880) to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-described gaming machine only gives the player an interest in the jackpot, and has a problem of reducing the interest of the game for the variable display which is out. Further interest improvement of the game was required.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Based on the establishment of the second condition, identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The information stored in the information storage unit is determined by the prior determination unit before the second condition is established. Based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, execution of a continuous effect that executes a specific effect every time dynamic display of identification information is performed on information already stored in the information storage means Is determined by the effect determination means. The motion of the information stored in the information storage means stored later than the determined information at a predetermined opportunity until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to execute the continuous effect by the effect determining means It is determined by the suggestion effect determination means whether or not to execute the suggestion effect on the visual display. As a result, since the suggested effect is executed even after the continuous effect ends, the player can be made to think that the continuous effect is continuing. Therefore, it is possible to make the continuous effect appear as if the number of times is greater than the actual number of continuous times, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  A dynamic display mode in which one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in the gaming machine N1. It has a determination means, The said effect determination means is said continuous, when it is determined that the said specific dynamic display mode is the said information determined by the said dynamic display mode determination means by the said prior determination means A game machine N2 characterized in that it is decided to execute an effect.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Since the continuous effect is executed by the effect determining means when it is determined by the advance determining means that the specific dynamic display mode is the information to be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, in the continuous effect, the specific dynamic It is possible to perform the dynamic display mode, and it is possible to early recognize that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by the start of the continuous rendering.

  In the game machine N1 or N2, a game machine N3 characterized in that the suggested effect is an effect to be executed also in a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestion effect is executed even in a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect, so that the suggestion effect is executed to start the continuous effect. Can be expected to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the gaming machine is characterized by having a number determining means for determining the number of consecutive times by lottery when it is determined by the suggested effect determining means to execute the suggested effect. N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 to N3 and when the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determining means, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number determination means by lottery As a result, the number of times the suggestion effect is performed can be made random and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J4, J1 to K5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, In any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine E1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J4, J1 to K5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, A gaming machine E2 characterized in that, in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I4, J1 to J4, J1 to K5, K1 to K7, L1 to L23, A gaming machine E3 characterized in that, in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, a lottery is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening, and a symbol indicating the lottery result is dynamically displayed on the display means. In the dynamic display showing the lottery result of 1, by temporarily stopping the symbols and starting the dynamic display again, a gaming machine is proposed to show the player as if the lottery results were displayed dynamically several times. (For example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-39747).
However, in such a gaming machine, when it is determined by the player that the temporary stop has occurred, there has been a problem that the enjoyment of the effect is reduced.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a lottery means for executing a lottery, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information on the display means. The dynamic display means for dynamic display, the dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information indicating the lottery result specific to the display means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when displayed, and the identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped as the dynamic display of the lottery result of 1 and temporarily stopped. Is also included , And the when the identification symbols is temporarily stopped by the quasi-continuous dynamic display mode, and has a stationary symbol display means for displaying overlapping the stationary pattern to the front side of the identification symbols.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is periodically changed to be displayed dynamically.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and the identification symbol is displayed dynamically again. It is to be hidden before starting.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the dynamic display mode determining means is based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The pseudo continuous display mode is set so as to be easily determined when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Then, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game which is advantageous to the player. The identification information indicates the result of the lottery by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols. In addition, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, as the dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily displayed again after being temporarily stopped In the case where the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode, the still symbol is displayed superimposed on the front side of the identification symbol by the static symbol display means.
This makes it possible to make it look as if the temporarily stopped identification symbol has been decidedly stopped by the static symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the interest of the game is reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is periodically changed and displayed dynamically Therefore, there is an effect that it can be informed that it is temporarily stopped in an easy-to-understand manner.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the still symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and the dynamic display of the identification symbol starts Since the display is hidden before being displayed, the player can easily view the identification symbol.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order. There is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effect is exerted. That is, in the dynamic display mode determination means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the lottery result by the lottery means. And, in the pseudo continuous display mode, since it is set so that it is easy to be determined when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, it is possible to make the player expect the specific lottery result in the pseudo continuous display mode effective.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Display Means 114 Display Control Device (Part of Dynamic Display Means)
S305 Lottery means S307, S309 Part of dynamic display mode determination means S1004 Part of bonus game execution means

Claims (2)

Determination means for performing the determination ;
Display means for identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed,
Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
And dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode is by Ri dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means,
A gaming machine comprising : bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means.
The identification information, which in combination display mode that by the combination of a plurality of identification symbols indicating the determination result by the determining means,
In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, after temporarily stopping the identification symbol in the combined display mode as the dynamic display of the determination result of 1, after the temporary stop, It includes a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which dynamic display is performed again, and
The gaming machine overlaps the front side of the identification symbols temporarily stopped in the combination display mode when the identification symbols are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode Means for displaying a predetermined static symbol having no identification information in a mode corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode has been executed within the dynamic display of the determination result of 1 der those having is,
The stationary pattern is gaming machine, characterized in der Rukoto which the identification symbols are temporarily stopped is hidden on the basis that the dynamic display. The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display .

Images